2010 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1
Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-38
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Universal Remote System . . . . 4-44
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-17
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-26
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-34
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-41
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-55
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
it appears in this manual.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the
GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the
CHEVROLET Emblem, the name
Camaro and the Camaro Emblem
are registered trademarks of
General Motors LLC.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase
or due to changes subsequent to
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 92199576 C Third Printing
© 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
Using this Manual
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
To quickly locate information
about the vehicle, use the Index
in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number
where it can be found.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
WARNING
{
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Symbols
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the index.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Changer
_ : High Voltage
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
I : Brake System Warning
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Light
} : Power
" : Charging System
(12‐Volt Battery)
[ : Green Leaf Display Options
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
I : Cruise Control
: Electric Parking Brake
d : Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-1
Exterior Mirrors
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 1-13
Keys and Locks
Interior Mirrors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-13
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Roof
Doors
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . 1-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key, that is part of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
can be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press the button on the RKE
transmitter to extend the key. Press
the button and the key blade to
retract the key.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 12‑6 or OnStar® System
on page 4‑42
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-3
.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
If available, the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter will work
up to 65 feet (20 m) away from the
vehicle.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
RKE without Remote Start Shown
The following may be available:
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking, see “Remote
Feedback” under Vehicle
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 1‑3.
.
Check the distance.
The transmitter may be
too far from the vehicle.
.
Check the location. Other
Personalization on page 4‑38
.
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
If the passenger door is open when
Q is pressed, all doors lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
V (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold to unlock the trunk.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door, if enabled through the
vehicle personalization.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release
one time to locate the vehicle.
The exterior lamps flash and the
horn chirps.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter
is programmed to this vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work
once the new transmitter is
Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 1‑9
.
Press and hold 7 for at least
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors, see
“Remote Unlock” under Vehicle
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed
again or the key is placed in the
ignition and turned to ON/RUN.
Personalization on page 4‑38
.
programmed.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate unlocking, see “Remote
Feedback” under Vehicle
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For
vehicles with this feature, press Q
and then / to start the engine from
outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 1‑5 for additional
information.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery in Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery in Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑34.
Personalization on page 4‑38
.
Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
The battery is not rechargeable.
See your dealer to replace the
battery.
page 1‑9
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-5
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3
for additional information.
Extending Engine Run Time
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have this feature
which allows you to start the engine
from outside the vehicle.
For a 10 minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
only be extended once.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minutes will start
immediately.
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
To enable and disable remote start,
see “Remote Start” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑38.
For example, if the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
During a remote start the climate
control system will turn on with
the fan speed, air delivery mode,
and temperature settings that the
system was set to when the vehicle
was last turned off. If the fan is
set to O (Off), the climate control
system will not turn on.
2. Press and hold / for about
two seconds. The turn signal
lamps will flash to confirm the
vehicle has been started. The
parking lamps will turn on and
remain on as long as the engine
is running. The vehicle's doors
will be locked.
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition switch must
be turned to ON/RUN and then back
to LOCK/OFF using the key before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
3. The key must be inserted and
turned to ON/RUN before
driving.
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the key is
inserted and turned to ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
.
Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
WARNING (Continued)
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
To shut off the engine:
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
.
Press / until the parking lamps
turn off.
Door Locks
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
WARNING
{
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Insert the key and turn it to
ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
.
Passengers, especially
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
The remote start will not operate if:
.
The key is in the ignition.
.
The hood is not closed.
Manual Door Locks
.
The hazard warning flashers
Lock the doors from inside the
vehicle by pressing down the button
on the top of the door.
are on.
.
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
(Continued)
The doors can also be unlocked
from the inside by pulling the door
handle. Pulling the door handle
again unlatches the door.
.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
.
The oil pressure is low.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Lockout Protection
1-7
Unlock the door from the outside by
turning the key counterclockwise.
Power Door Locks
The vehicle can be programmed
to prevent lockout if set in
personalization.
Lock all doors from the outside by
turning the key clockwise.
The door lock cylinder turns freely
when either the wrong key is used,
or the correct key is not fully
inserted. The free turning door lock
feature prevents the lock from being
forced open.
If the driver door is open and the
RKE lock button is pressed, the
driver door will not lock. When the
driver door is opened, and the key is
in the ignition, a reminder chime
sounds continuously. The vehicle
remains locked only when both
doors are closed. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑38.
To reset the lock, turn it to the
vertical position with the correct key
fully inserted. Remove the key and
insert it again.
The power door lock switch is on
the center console.
If this does not reset the lock, turn
the key half-way around in the
cylinder and repeat the reset
procedure.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock both
doors.
Q (Lock): Press to lock both doors.
To program the power door locks,
see Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑38
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Trunk Release
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
To open the trunk from the outside
Trunk
the vehicle, press the V button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
WARNING
{
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or
with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle has a power
liftgate, disable the power
(Continued)
liftgate function.
From inside the vehicle, press
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.
the V button located on the
driver door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-9
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Vehicle Security
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities.
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not
make it impossible to steal.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
There is an emergency trunk
release handle located inside the
trunk on the trunk latch. On some
vehicles, the release handle can be
accessed by folding the rear seat
center seatback. See Rear Seats
on page 2‑6
.
Pull the release handle to open the
trunk from the inside.
Return the release handle to
its original position for proper
operation.
The security light is located on the
instrument panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
Arming the System
How the System Alarm is
Activated
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
To arm the system, press Q on the
RKE transmitter.
To activate the system if it is armed,
open any door, the trunk or hood.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
If the horn sounds and the turn
signal lamps flash three times
The alarm automatically arms after
about 30 seconds. The security
light, located on the instrument
panel, flashes.
when K is pressed, an attempted
break-in has occurred while the
system was armed. The vehicle
may also display a message on the
DIC. See Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages on page 4‑36 for more
information.
How to Turn Off the System
Alarm
Disarming the System
To turn off the system alarm, do one
of the following:
To disarm the system, do one of the
following:
.
Press K on the RKE transmitter.
.
Press K on the RKE transmitter.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
.
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
.
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
The theft-deterrent system is
disarmed when the alarm is
turned off.
The security light stays on for
approximately one second when the
vehicle is disarming.
If the system is armed when there
are people inside of the vehicle,
pulling the door handle from the
inside one time will unlock the door.
Pulling the handle a second time will
unlatch the door.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-11
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start and
the light continues to stay on try
another key.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The immobilizer light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Light on
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start,
the first key may be damaged.
See your dealer who can service
the theft-deterrent system and have
a new key made.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
page 4‑27
.
started with the correct key. The key
uses a transponder that matches
an immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
immobilizer light comes on briefly
when the ignition is turned on.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the
immobilizer light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
To adjust each mirror:
Power Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors
1. Press the switch to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
Convex Mirrors
2. Press one of the four sides on
WARNING
{
the i (control pad) to adjust the
mirror.
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors
have controls located on the driver
door armrest.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-13
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
vehicle is started.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror
for a clear view of the area behind
your vehicle. To avoid glare of the
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it
for nighttime use.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Climate Control Systems on
page 7‑1 for more information.
Automatic Dimming
Mirror
If the vehicle is equipped with an
automatic dimming outside mirror
on the driver side, the mirror will
adjust for the glare of headlamps
behind you.
Vehicles with OnStar have
Vehicles with OnStar have
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information on the
system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See the OnStar owner's
guide for more information about
the services OnStar provides.
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information on the
system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See the OnStar owner's
guide for more information about
the services OnStar provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
Windows
WARNING
{
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The power window switches located
on the driver door control all
windows. The window switches on
the passenger door are only for that
window. Push the front of the switch
down to open the window. Pull the
switch up to close it.
The switches work when the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 8‑19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-15
Window Indexing
Express Window Operation
WARNING
{
This automatically lowers the
The front window switches have an
express-up or down feature that
lowers or raises the window without
holding the switch. Pull the switch
up or press it down all the way and
release it. Stop the window by
pressing or pulling the switch.
window a small amount when the
door is opened. When the door is
closed, the window will raise fully.
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse
automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
If the vehicle loses power or the
window freezes, this feature may
not work. From outside the vehicle,
close the door and push the window
inward so that the glass goes under
the molding.
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
When express-up is active, the
window will auto-reverse if there
is an obstruction or severe icing.
The window returns to normal
operation after the obstruction or
condition is removed.
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Override
If the “Open, Then Close Driver
Window” or “Open, Then Close
Passenger Window” messages are
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), follow the procedure
for Programming the Power
The anti-pinch feature can
be overridden by holding the
window switch all the way down.
The window will lower for as long as
the switch is held. Once the switch
is released, the express mode is
re-activated. In this mode, the
window can still close on an object
in its path. Use care when using the
override mode.
Windows later in this section. See
also Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑28
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
Programming the Power
Windows
Roof
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected,
or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window
for the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switch is located on the overhead
console.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
The sunroof only operates when
the ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/
ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑19.
To program each front window,
follow these steps:
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor toward you or
move it to the side to reduce glare.
1. With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-17
express-open the sunroof. To stop
the sunroof from opening, press the
Express Sunroof Operation
switch again.
A deflector automatically raises
when the sunroof is opened and
retracts while the sunroof closes.
If the sunshade is closed, it opens
automatically when the sunroof
opens past the vented position.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel
may cause damage and the
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof may not operate properly.
Always close the glass panel
before closing the sunshade.
sunroof seal or in the tracks that
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise or plug the water
drainage system. Periodically open
the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
The sunroof can be opened without
holding the switch down. Push the
switch in the open direction until the
second pause. The sunroof will
fully open.
To close the sunroof, press the front
of the switch and hold it until the
sunroof is closed. The sunroof will
stop if the switch is released. Close
the sunshade by hand.
To stop the sunroof from moving,
press either the open or close
sunroof switch.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
Press and release the back of the
switch to open the sunroof to the
vent position. Press it again to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-41
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-43
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Replacing LATCH System
2-1
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-21
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Replacing Safety Belt System
Seats and
Restraints
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Airbag System
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-24
When Should an Airbag
Front Seats
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Passenger Sensing
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-34
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-35
Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top
of the seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle's head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Seat Height Adjustment
2-3
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Lift the handle under the seat to
unlock it.
To manually raise or lower the seat,
move the lever repeatedly upward
or downward.
2. Slide the seat and release the
handle.
3. Try to move the seat to be sure
it is locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Seats and Restraints
Power Seat Adjustment
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING
{
WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving.
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver's
seat only when the vehicle is not
moving.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by moving the control
forward or rearward.
.
Move the whole seat up or down
by moving the control up
or down.
.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Tilt the seat by turning the
control forward or rearward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-5
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Seatback Latches
WARNING
{
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Lift the seatback to return it to the
upright position. Push and pull on
the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
On vehicles with power reclining
seatbacks the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat.
To access the rear seats pull up on
the latch, located on the rear of the
driver or front passenger seatback.
Fold the seatback forward.
.
To recline the seatback, move
the control toward the rear of the
vehicle.
.
To raise the seatback, move the
control toward the front of the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Seats and Restraints
On vehicles with heated front seats,
the controls are on the center
console. The engine must be
running.
Heated Front Seats
Rear Seats
The rear seat has two designated
seating positions and can be folded
for more cargo space. Fold only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using the
seat heater, especially for long
periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that
L (Heated Seat): Press to turn on
the heated seat.
To fold the seatback down:
A light indicates that the feature
is working. The number of lights
shows the level of heat selected:
one or two for a low or high setting.
Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings and to turn
the heated seat feature off.
insulates against heat, such as
a blanket, cushion, cover or
similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
1. Pull on the strap located on the
top of the of the rear seatback.
2. Fold the seatback down.
Lift the seatback up to raise it, and
push it back to lock it into place.
Make sure the safety belt is not
twisted or caught in the seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-7
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
WARNING
{
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 4‑17 for additional
information.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
restrained properly too.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Seats and Restraints
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-9
The person keeps going until
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Seats and Restraints
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
A: You could be — whether you
are wearing a safety belt or not.
But your chance of being
conscious during and after an
accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if
you are belted. And you can
unbuckle a safety belt, even if
you are upside down.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-11
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 2‑36 or Infants and Young
Children on page 2‑39. Follow
those rules for everyone's
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
protection this way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-13
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much
force to the ribs, which are not
as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
1. If the seat has a safety belt
guide, and the safety belt is
not routed through the guide,
snap the guide around the belt
webbing. Be sure the belt is not
twisted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-17
2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 2‑20
.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Seats and Restraints
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Pretensioners work only once.
If the pretensioners activate in a
crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for
the vehicle's safety belt system.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 2‑21.
There is one guide for each
outboard passenger position in the
rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of
a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side
crash.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides
may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from
between the edge of the
seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its
storage clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-19
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is
not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the guide on top.
WARNING
{
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Seats and Restraints
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide onto the clip, leaving only
the loop of the elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Properly secure the guide before
folding the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-21
Safety System Check
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING (Continued)
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 4‑17 for more
information.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
WARNING
{
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
page 2‑21
.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑18.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Seats and Restraints
All of the airbags in your vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
WARNING
{
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
For frontal airbags, the word
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑25.
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
The vehicle may also have the
following airbags:
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-23
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 2‑36 or Infants
and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑18
for more information.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
page 2‑39
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-25
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags
for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard
passengers, they are in the ceiling
above the side windows.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of
an inflating roof-rail airbag will
be blocked.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
WARNING
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate
at different crash speeds.
For example:
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
In addition, the vehicle has
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. Roof-rail
airbags are intended to deploy on
both sides in some high threshold
frontal impacts.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a
more severe frontal impact.
For moderate frontal impacts,
dual-stage airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts,
full deployment occurs.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact airbags. Your vehicle may
or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 2‑22
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail
airbags are intended to inflate in a
severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags will
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-27
But airbags would not help in
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
page 2‑25 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Seats and Restraints
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out
of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
WARNING (Continued)
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑27.
WARNING
{
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when
the airbags inflate. You can lock the
doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
flashers off by using the controls
for those features.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-29
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 12‑15 and Event Data
Recorders on page 12‑15.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.
United States
Airbags are designed to inflate
.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Canada and Mexico
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If you
are using remote start to start the
vehicle from a distance, if equipped,
you may not see the system check.
When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and
roof‐rail airbags (if equipped) are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
WARNING (Continued)
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
WARNING
{
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-31
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑19.
frontal airbag, depending upon
the person's seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
.
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger
seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
WARNING
{
.
The system determines that a
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
small child is present in a child
restraint.
.
The system determines that a
small child is present in a
booster seat.
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
For some children who have
.
The right front passenger seat is
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
Seats and Restraints
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit,
secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position
in the vehicle, and check with
your dealer.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 2‑50 or Securing
Child Restraints (Right Front
Seat) on page 2‑52.
If a person of adult-size is sitting
in the right front passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could
be because that person is not
sitting properly in the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-33
If this happens, use the following
steps to allow the system to detect
that person and enable the right
front passenger frontal airbag:
The passenger sensing system may
turn on the passenger airbag when
liquid soaks into the seat. If this
happens, the on indicator will be lit.
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
1. Turn the vehicle off.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Readiness Light on page 4‑18
for important safety information.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
WARNING
{
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and
seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑34 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
one minute after the on indicator
is lit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-34
Seats and Restraints
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
WARNING
{
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 12‑13.
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-35
In addition, the vehicle has
a passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or
a comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
If you have questions,
In addition, your dealer and the
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 12‑1.
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑18 for more information.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
A: If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 12‑1.
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off
the passenger airbag(s).
Inflate? on page 2‑27. See your
dealer for service.
See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑29
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-36
Seats and Restraints
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
Child Restraints
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
on page 4‑18 for more information.
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-37
.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the below fit test:
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑16
.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑16 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-38
Seats and Restraints
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Never do this.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-39
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young
Children
WARNING (Continued)
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and
never allow children to play
with the safety belts.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-40
Seats and Restraints
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-41
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-42
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt,
or by the LATCH system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-43
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑45 for more information.
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
In some areas, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints.
In the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website
to locate the nearest child safety
seat inspection station.
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
WARNING
{
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-44
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
WARNING (Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors
for additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to
or interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Secure rear-facing child
WARNING
{
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑29 for additional
information.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors
2-45
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint
with lower attachments (B).
child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to
attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-46
Seats and Restraints
Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Rear Seat
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
If the child restraint does not have a
top tether, one can be obtained, in
kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-47
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
According to accidents statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑43 for
The top tether anchors are located
on the rear seatback filler panel.
Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
additional information.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover of
the anchor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-48
Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
WARNING
{
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
manual.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-49
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
instructions and the
following instructions:
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-50
Seats and Restraints
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 2‑43.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑45 for how and
where to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑45 for top tether anchor
locations.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-51
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-52
Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑45 for more
information.
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑43
WARNING
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑29 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4‑19 for more information,
including important safety
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-53
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
WARNING (Continued)
If the seat has a safety belt
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
guide, remove the safety belt
from the guide by unsnapping
the guide on the seat. Do not
secure the child restraint with
the safety belt routed through
the guide.
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑29 for additional
information.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑45 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and
it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑45
for top tether anchor locations.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal
airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay
lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-54
Seats and Restraints
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-55
If the airbag is off, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑29 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the seat has a safety belt guide,
return the safety belt into the guide
by snapping the guide around the
webbing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-56
Seats and Restraints
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-1
Storage
Compartments
Additional Storage
Features
Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-1
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever. Use the key to lock and
unlock the glove box.
Convenience Net
For vehicles with a convenience net
located inside the trunk, it can be
used to secure loose items.
Additional Storage Features
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Center Console Storage
To open, lift the latch on the
front edge.
There is an Accessory Power Outlet
(APO) and an optional USB/audio
jack located in the storage area.
See Power Outlets on page 4‑9
and Auxiliary Devices on page 6‑16
for more information.
The upper (A) and lower (C) hooks
on each side of the trunk opening
are provided to attach the net.
Install the opening of the net at the
top and over the two middle
hooks (B).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Storage
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-1
Engine Oil Temperature
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 4-27
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Instruments and
Controls
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Transmission Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-17
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-18
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-20
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Brake System Warning
Information Displays
Driver Information
Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Vehicle Messages
Controls
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Brake System Messages . . . . 4-32
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-32
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Engine Cooling System
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Traction Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-33
Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-34
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-34
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-34
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-36
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 4-36
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Engine Oil Pressure
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-25
Traction Control System
(TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak® OFF
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-26
Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Instruments and Controls
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-36
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-37
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 4-37
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-38
OnStar® System
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 4-44
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-3
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-5
A. Air Vents on page 7‑3.
G. Cruise Control on page 8‑39
.
M. Transmission Temperature
Gauge on page 4‑16
Voltmeter Gauge on
page 4‑17. Engine Oil
Temperature Gauge on
page 4‑14. Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge on page 4‑13.
.
B. Driver Shift Controls
H. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 5‑1. Front Fog Lamps
on page 5‑5 (If Equipped).
Instrument Panel Illumination
(If Equipped). See Automatic
Transmission on page 8‑26.
C. Instrument Cluster on
Control on page 5‑6
I. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 4‑6
.
page 4‑11
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑7
.
N. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Park on page 8‑22.
.
.
J. Horn on page 4‑7.
E. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑7.
O. Power Outlets on page 4‑9.
K. Steering Wheel Controls on
F. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 5‑5. Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 5‑3. Flash-to-Pass on
page 5‑3. Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑28
(If Equipped).
P. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 5‑4. Power Door Locks
page 4‑6
L. Climate Control Systems on
page 7‑1
.
on page 1‑7
.
.
Q. Glove Box on page 3‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Instruments and Controls
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
Steering Wheel Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down or backward or forward
into a comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the tilt lever while
driving.
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
The lever is on the outboard side of
the steering column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-7
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle.
The lever returns to its starting
position when released. For more
cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles
with OnStar® or Bluetooth®
systems, press to interact with
those systems. See OnStar®
System on page 4‑42 and
Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑21
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 6‑22 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 6‑25 for
more information.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the inboard side of the
steering column.
6 (Intermittent): Move the lever
to choose a delayed wiping cycle.
For vehicles with the variable
intermittent feature, the time
between wipes can be adjusted.
c / $ (End Call / Mute): Press to
reject an incoming call, or end a
current call. Press to silence the
vehicle speakers while using the
infotainment system. Press again
to turn the sound on.
Turn the & band for a longer
or shorter delay interval.
x (Low): Slow wipes.
[ (High): Fast wipes.
_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to
Push up or pull down on the lever
to place it in one of the following
positions.
select an audio source.
Toggle up or down to select the next
or previous favorite radio station or
CD/MP3 track.
+ x − (Volume): Press + or − to
increase or decrease the volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washer: Pull the lever
toward you to spray washer fluid
on the windshield. The spray
continues until the lever is released.
The wipers will run a few times.
See Washer Fluid on page 9‑26 for
information on filling the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive
a GPS signal. The compass
system will automatically determine
when the GPS signal is restored
and provide a heading again.
See Compass Messages on
page 4‑32 for more information
on the messages that may be
displayed for the compass.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
from the Global Positioning
WARNING
{
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
In freezing weather, do not
use your washer until the
windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer fluid can form ice on
the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
See Backglass Antenna on
page 6‑13 and Satellite Radio
Antenna on page 6‑13 for the
location of the vehicle's antennas.
The compass system is designed
to operate for a certain number of
Clock
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on
page 6‑3 for information about
how to use the menu system.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If the
wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw
them. If they become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts.
See Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 9‑32
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-9
Setting the Time and Date
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
Setting the Month & Day
Format
Power Outlets
The vehicle has two accessory
power outlets; one is located below
the climate control system and the
other is inside the center storage
console.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select MM/DD (month/day) or
DD/MM (day/month).
The accessory power outlets do not
work when the key is removed from
the ignition and the driver door is
opened, this helps to preserve the
battery life of the vehicle.
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the next value.
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
6. To save the time or date and
return to the Time and Date
Settings menu, press the
Certain power accessory plugs may
not be compatible to the accessory
power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional
information on the accessory
power plugs.
0 BACK button at any time or
press MENU/SELECT knob after
adjusting the minutes or year.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to turn Auto Time Adjust on
or off.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Instruments and Controls
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Each outlet is rated
to a maximum output of 120W.
Usage of equipment exceeding
an amperage rating of 20A may
require fuse replacement. Check
with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not hang any type
of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because
the power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-11
Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Automatic Shown, Metric and Manual Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Trip Odometer
Fuel Gauge
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
The trip odometer shows how far
the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last set
to zero.
Set the odometer using the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
To set the trip odometer to zero,
press and hold the SET button
while the trip odometer display is
showing.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the
old odometer. If this is not possible,
it is set at zero and a label is put on
the driver's door to show the old
mileage reading.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-13
When the fuel tank is low on fuel, a
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge
Fuel Level Low message will appear
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). For more information see
Fuel System Messages on
page 4‑34
.
Here are some situations that can
occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
fuel gauge.
.
At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
Metric
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge shows about how much fuel
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
English
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates which side of the vehicle
the fuel door is located.
The gauge indicates empty before
the vehicle is out of fuel, to show
that the vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
.
The pointer on the fuel gauge is
on empty when the ignition is off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Instruments and Controls
in the Driver Information Center
Engine Oil Temperature
Gauge
(DIC). See Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑33 and Engine Oil on
page 9‑10 for more information.
WARNING
{
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Metric
The oil pressure gauge, located in
front of the shifter, shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
English
Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the
normal operating range. When
the oil pressure reaches the low
pressure zone, a message appears
A reading in the low pressure zone
can be caused by a dangerously
low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check the
oil as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-15
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
Metric
Metric
This gauge, located in front of the
shifter, shows the engine oil
temperature.
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
English
If the gauge pointer moves towards
the H, the engine is too hot.
If the gauge pointer moves into the
red area, it means that the engine
oil has overheated. If the vehicle
has been operated under normal
driving conditions, pull off the road,
stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
This reading indicates the same
thing as the warning message.
It means that the engine coolant
has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop
the vehicle, and turn off the engine
as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 9‑23 for more
information.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Instruments and Controls
For information on the DIC
messages see Transmission
Messages on page 4‑37.
Transmission
Temperature Gauge
Notice: If the vehicle is
driven with the transmission
temperature gauge above the
normal operating range, the
transmission can be damaged.
This could lead to costly repairs
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not drive the
vehicle while the transmission
temperature gauge reading is
above normal. See your dealer
for service.
Metric
This gauge, located in front of the
shifter, shows the transmission oil
temperature when the ignition is on.
If the gauge is reading in the red
area and/or a message appears
in the DIC, the vehicle must be
stopped and the cause checked.
One possible cause is a low level
in the transmission.
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-17
normal for the voltmeter to fluctuate.
Voltmeter Gauge
Safety Belt Reminders
Readings between the low and high
warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Readings in the low warning zone
can occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a message
appears in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and/or the charging
system light comes on. See Battery
Voltage and Charging Messages on
page 4‑31 and Charging System
Light on page 4‑20 for more
information.
English Shown, Metric Similar
When the engine is started this
light and a chime come on and stay
on for several seconds to remind
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
The light also begins to flash.
This gauge, located in front of the
shifter, shows the battery's state of
charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, but the
ignition is on, this gauge shows the
condition of the charging system.
The vehicle's charging system
regulates voltage based on the
state of charge of the battery. It is
However, readings in either warning
zone can indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system.
Have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
come on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
Instruments and Controls
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started.
Then the light turns off.
safety belt
The passenger safety belt reminder
light is located on the overhead
console.
Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
{
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring, and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
When the engine is started, this light
and the chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind the
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
The light also begins to flash.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
page 2‑22
.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-19
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start to start your vehicle
from a distance, if equipped, you
may not see the system check.
Then, after several seconds, the
status indicator will light either ON
or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol to let you know the status
of the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑29
for important safety information.
The overhead console has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
status indicator lights remain on,
or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights
or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer for service.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
United States
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Canada and Mexico
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
Instruments and Controls
When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
displays a message.
Charging System Light
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 4‑31.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned on
but the engine is not running, as a
check to show the light is working.
It should go out when the engine is
started.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
Check Engine Light
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-21
Notice: If the vehicle is
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected by:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 8‑46. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
Notice: Modifications made
to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
also result in a failure to
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the engine off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
.
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition
is usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
Instruments and Controls
.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
The vehicle will not pass
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
.
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the key is in
ON/RUN and the light is not on.
See Gasoline Specifications on
page 8‑44
.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer can
check the vehicle. The dealer
has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-23
When the ignition is on, the brake
Brake System Warning
Light
WARNING
{
system warning light also comes on
when parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does
not fully release. If it stays on after
the parking brake is fully released,
it means the vehicle has a brake
problem.
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
The vehicle brake system
consists of two hydraulic circuits.
If one circuit is not working, the
remaining circuit can still work to
stop the vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working
If, while driving, the light comes on
and a brake message comes on
the Driver Information Center (DIC),
pull off the road and stop carefully.
The pedal could be harder to push
or the pedal can go closer to the
floor. It could take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on page 4‑24 and
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑90.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
The Brake message remains on
until the menu button is pressed.
The brake light remains until the
problem is fixed. See Brake System
Messages on page 4‑32 for more
information.
United States
Canada
If the vehicle has antilock brakes,
this light should come on when the
key is turned to START. If it does
not come on, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a
problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
Instruments and Controls
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. A chime may
also sound when the light comes on
steady.
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
Traction Off Light
If the ABS light is the only light on,
the vehicle has regular brakes,
but the antilock brakes are not
functioning.
This light comes on when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If both lights are on, the vehicle's
antilock brakes are not functioning
and there is a problem with the
regular brakes. See your dealer for
service.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
This light also comes on and the
system turns off if the there is a
problem with the TCS.
See Brake System Warning Light
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
If the light comes on and stays on
for an extended period of time while
the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.
on page 4‑23
.
See Brake System Messages on
page 4‑32 for all brake related DIC
messages.
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑34 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑35 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-25
If the TCS indicator/warning light
comes on and stays on while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the
StabiliTrak system is off, the system
does not assist in controlling the
vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the
StabiliTrak system and the warning
light turns off.
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
See Competitive Driving Mode on
page 8‑37, Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 8‑34 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑35 for more
information.
For SS models, if this light is on,
the vehicle is in Competitive Mode.
A warning also appears in the DIC
for StabiliTrak Competitive Mode.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 4‑35 for more information.
Traction Control System
(TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak®
OFF Light
The StabiliTrak system or the
Traction Control System (TCS)
indicator/warning light comes on
briefly while starting the engine.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑34 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑35 for more
information
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light will then go off.
The indicator/warning light flashes
while the StabiliTrak or TCS system
is working to control the vehicle on
a low traction surface.
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off .
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-26
Instruments and Controls
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Tire Pressure Light
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
For vehicles with a Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire
pressures and the Tire Pressure
Monitor System.
Operation on page 9‑60 for
more information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
When the Light is On Steady
WARNING
{
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
Do not keep driving if the oil
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 4‑36 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to
the pressure value shown on the
Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Tire Pressure on page 9‑56 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Cruise Control Light
4-27
Immobilizer Light
Fog Lamp Light
The immobilizer light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally
the indicator light turns off.
The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.
This light is white when the cruise
control is set and will be green when
the system is active.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Front Fog
Lamps on page 5‑5 for more
information.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑39 for more
information.
This light comes on when the
ignition is turned from LOCK/OFF
to ON/RUN and stays on if the
vehicle is immobilized. This
happens when an incorrect key or
an unprogrammed key is used to
start the vehicle.
Taillamp Indicator Light
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 1‑11 for more information.
This light comes on when the
taillamps are in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-28
Instruments and Controls
DIC Operation and Displays
w x (Thumbwheel): Use the
thumbwheel to scroll through the
items in each menu.
Information Displays
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using
the DIC buttons located on the turn
signal lever located on the left side
of the steering wheel. The DIC
displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
information, and warning messages
if a system problem is detected.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
SET (Set/Clear): Use this button to
set or clear the menu item when it is
displayed.
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). The DIC
displays information about your
vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages on
page 4‑31 for more information.
All messages appear in the DIC
display located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press the MENU button on the
turn signal lever until Trip/Fuel
Information Menu is displayed.
Use the thumbwheel to scroll
through the following menu items:
The bottom of the DIC display
shows what position the shift lever
is in (Automatic Transmission Only),
the odometer, and the direction the
vehicle is driving.
.
Digital Speedometer
.
DIC Buttons
Trip 1
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑38 for
more information.
.
Trip 2
.
Fuel Range
.
Average Fuel Economy
.
Average Vehicle Speed
.
Turn by Turn
MENU: Press this button to get to
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu.
.
Blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-29
Digital Speedometer
Average Fuel Economy
Turn by Turn
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
The Average Fuel Economy display
shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded
since the last time this menu item
was reset. The fuel economy can be
reset by pressing the SET button
while the Average Fuel Economy
display is showing.
This display is used for the OnStar
Turn by Turn guidance. See the
OnStar owner's guide for more
information.
Blank Display
Trip 1 and Trip 2
This display shows no information.
The Trip display shows the
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
current distance traveled, in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km), since
the last reset for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing the trip reset stem
or the SET button while the trip
odometer display is showing.
Press the MENU button on the turn
signal lever until Vehicle Information
Menu is displayed. Use the
thumbwheel to scroll through the
following menu items:
Average Vehicle Speed
The Average Vehicle Speed display
shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h). This
average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value.
The average speed can be reset by
pressing the SET button while the
Average Vehicle Speed display is
showing.
.
Fuel Range
Unit
.
The Fuel Range display shows the
approximate distance the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
The fuel range estimate is based
on an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be
reset.
Tire Pressure
.
Remaining Oil Life
.
Coolant Temp
.
Battery Voltage
.
Speed Warning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30
Instruments and Controls
Unit
When the remaining oil life is low,
Coolant Temperature
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑33. The oil should changed
as soon as possible. See Engine Oil
on page 9‑10. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance
is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Move the thumbwheel up or down to
switch between US or Metric when
the Unit display is active. Press SET
to confirm the setting. This will
change the displays on the cluster
and DIC to either English (US) or
metric measurements.
This display shows the temperature
of the engine cooling system fluid in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
Battery Voltage
This display, available on some
vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may
read Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts.
The vehicle's charging system
regulates voltage based on the
state of the battery. The battery
voltage can fluctuate while viewing
this information on the DIC. This is
normal. See Charging System Light
on page 4‑20 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, the DIC will
Tire Pressure
The display will show a vehicle with
the approximate pressures of all
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 9‑58 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑60
for more information.
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2 for more information.
Remember, the Oil Life display
must be reset after each oil change.
It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the Oil Life
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system
press the SET button while the Oil
Life display is active. See Engine
Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life.
If Remaining Oil Life 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of
the current oil life remains.
display a message. See Battery
Voltage and Charging Messages on
page 4‑31
.
Oil Life System on page 9‑13
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-31
Speed Warning
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Vehicle Messages
Speed Warning allows the driver to
set a speed that they do not want to
exceed. To set the Speed Warning
press SET when Speed Warning is
displayed.
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by
the driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
Battery Saver Active
This message displays when
the vehicle has detected that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Compass on
page 4‑8 for more information.
Some messages may not require
immediate action. For those you can
press SET to acknowledge that you
received the messages and to clear
them. Some messages cannot be
cleared because they are more
urgent. These messages require
action. You should take any
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages will
only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem. Possible
messages that can be displayed
and some information about them,
grouped by subject, are in the
following information.
Low Battery
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 9‑29 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-32
Instruments and Controls
Service Battery Charging
System
Compass Messages
Door Ajar Messages
CAL
Driver Door Open
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle
to your dealer for service.
This message is displayed when the
compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 4‑8.
This message will display when the
driver door is open. Close the door
completely.
– – –
Hood Open
Brake System Messages
Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your
dealer for service.
This message will display when
the hood is open. Close the hood
completely.
Brake Fluid Low
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low, see Brake
Fluid on page 9‑28.
Passenger Door Open
Cruise Control Messages
This message will display when the
passenger door is open. Close the
door completely.
Apply Brake Before Cruise
Release Parking Brake
If this message displays when
attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake and then try again.
This message is displayed as a
reminder that the parking brake is
on. Release it before you attempt
to drive.
Trunk Open
This message will display when
the trunk is open. Close the trunk
completely.
Cruise Set to XXX
This message will display when the
cruise control is set and it will show
the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑39 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-33
Engine Overheated — Idle
Engine
Engine Cooling System
Messages
Engine Oil Messages
Change Engine Oil Soon
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
A/C Off Due to High
Engine Temp
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑13 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑28 for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil on
This message displays when
the engine coolant becomes
hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added
strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns
to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive the vehicle.
Engine Overheated — Stop
Engine
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
page 9‑10 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2
for more information.
Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
High Coolant Temperature
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot; see Engine
Overheating on page 9‑23.
Coolant Level Low Add
Coolant
Engine Oil Low — Add Oil
This message displays when the
engine oil level is too low. Check
the oil level. See Engine Oil on
This message will display if the
coolant is low; see Engine Coolant
on page 9‑18
.
page 9‑10
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-34
Instruments and Controls
message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Low — Stop
Engine
Lamp Messages
Automatic Light Control On
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
This message is displayed when the
automatic light control has been
turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 5‑4.
Fuel System Messages
Fuel Level Low
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible
Automatic Light Control Off
This message is displayed when the
automatic light control has been
turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 5‑4.
Tighten Gas Cap
Engine Power Messages
This message displays when the
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
Engine Power Is Reduced
Left Front Turn Indicator
Failure
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
Key and Lock Messages
This message is displayed if the
turn signal bulb needs to be
replaced. See Headlamps, Front
Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
(Base Vehicle) on page 9‑37 or
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps (Up-Level Vehicle)
on page 9‑38 and Replacement
Bulbs on page 9‑41 for more
information.
Number Of Keys Programmed
This message displays when
programming new keys to the
vehicle.
Replace Battery In Remote Key
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter needs to be
replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Service Park Assist
4-35
Left Rear Turn Indicator Failure Right Rear Turn Indicator
Failure
This message is displayed if the
This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the park assist
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
turn signal bulb needs to be
replaced. See Taillamps, Turn
This message is displayed if the
turn signal bulb needs to be
Signal, and Stoplamps on
page 9‑40 and Replacement Bulbs
on page 9‑41 for more information.
replaced. See Taillamps, Turn
Signal, and Stoplamps on
page 9‑40 and Replacement Bulbs
on page 9‑41 for more information.
Ride Control System
Messages
Right Front Turn Indicator
Failure
Turn Signal On
Stabilitrak Competitive Mode
(V8 Engine Only)
This message is displayed if the
turn signal bulb needs to be
replaced. See Headlamps, Front
Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
(Base Vehicle) on page 9‑37 or
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps (Up-Level Vehicle)
on page 9‑38 and Replacement
Bulbs on page 9‑41 for more
information.
This message is displayed if
the turn signal has been left on.
Turn off the turn signal.
This message displays when
competitive mode is selected.
See Competitive Driving Mode on
page 8‑37 for more information.
Object Detection System
Messages
Service Traction Control
Park Assist Off
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer
for service.
This message is displayed when the
park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 8‑41
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-36
Instruments and Controls
Service Stabilitrak
Service Vehicle Soon
Safety Belt Messages
This message displays if there is
a problem with the StabiliTrak®
system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off
the engine and remove the key from
the ignition; open and close the
driver door and wait for at least
one minute. During this time you
should notice the lights on the
cluster turn off. After a minute has
passed start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your dealer
for service. The vehicle is safe to
drive, however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
Buckle Seatbelt
This message displays as a
reminder when the safety belt
is not buckled.
Tire Messages
Check XXX Tire Pressure
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
This message displays if the vehicle
detects low pressure in one or more
tires. The tire with the low pressure
will be shown in the message.
Check the tire pressures.
Theft Attempted
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Service Tire Monitor System
Service Vehicle Messages
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑60 for more information.
Service AC System
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the air conditioning
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
Airbag System Messages
Service Airbag
Tire Learning Active
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
Service Power Steering
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑60 for more information.
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the power steering
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-37
Tire Pressure System Reset
Shift Denied
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
This message displays when
resetting the TPMS. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑60 for more information.
This message displays when
attempting to use the automatic
transmission manual mode to shift
to too low of a gear. See Manual
Mode on page 8‑29 for more
information.
Ice Possible Drive With Care
This message is displayed when ice
conditions are possible.
Transmission Messages
Turn Wiper Control to
Intermittent First
Shift To Park
1 – 4 Shift
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted
to park. This may appear when
attempting to remove the key from
the ignition if the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
This message displays when you
can only shift from 1 (First) to
4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First)
to 2 (Second). See Manual
Transmission on page 8‑30
for more information.
This message is displayed when
attempting to adjust the intermittent
wiper speed without intermittent
selected on the wiper control.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑7
.
Transmission Hot – Idle
Engine
Press Clutch To Start
Vehicle Speed Messages
This message displays when
attempting to start a vehicle with
a manual transmission without
pressing on the clutch pedal.
Driver Selected Speed Limit
Exceeded
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool.
This message is displayed when the
vehicle speed is greater than the set
speed. See “Speed Warning” under
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
Service Transmission
This message displays if there is
a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer.
page 4‑28
.
This message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-38
Instruments and Controls
3. Press the center of the
MENU / SELECT knob to select
the Vehicle Settings menu.
Window Messages
Vehicle
Personalization
The audio system controls are
used to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features.
Open, Then Close Driver
Window
The following list of menu items will
be available:
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you
will need to reprogram each front
window for the express up feature
to work. See Power Windows on
page 1‑14 for more information.
.
Climate and Air Quality
.
Comfort and Convenience
CONFIG (Configuration): Press
to access the Configuration
Settings Menu.
.
Collision/Detection Systems
.
.
.
.
.
Language
MENU / SELECT Knob: Press
the center of this knob to enter
the menus and select menu items.
Turn the knob to scroll through the
menus.
Lighting
Power Door Locks
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Return to Factory Settings
Open, Then Close Passenger
Window
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you
will need to reprogram each front
window for the express up feature
to work. See Power Windows on
page 1‑14 for more information.
0 BACK: Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
highlight the menu. Press the knob
to select it. Each of the menus is
detailed in the following information.
Entering the Personalization
Menus
1. Press the CONFIG button to
access the Configuration
Settings menu.
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to highlight Vehicle Settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-39
Chime Volume
Park Assist
Climate and Air Quality
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
Assist feature to be turned on or off.
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following will be
displayed:
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Chime Volume is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Normal or
High. Press the knob to confirm and
go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Park Assist is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select On or Off.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
.
Remote Start Heated Seats
Remote Start Heated Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on when using remote
start.
Personalization by Driver
Language
This allows the selection of if the
personalization settings are specific
to each driver or the same no matter
which key was used to enter and
start the vehicle.
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Heated Seats is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
.
English
.
French
.
Spanish
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Personalization by Driver is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Comfort and Convenience
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
select the language. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
.
Chime Volume
Collision/Detection Systems
Lighting
.
Personalization by Driver
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following will
be displayed:
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
.
Exit Lighting
.
Park Assist
.
Vehicle Locator Lights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-40
Instruments and Controls
Exit Lighting
Auto Door Unlock
Power Door Locks
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or when
the key is removed from the ignition
(manual transmission).
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
.
Auto Door Unlock
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Off,
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
.
Delayed Door Lock
Press the MENU / SELECT
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
knob when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
When on, this feature will keep the
driver's door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available.
Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off.
Delayed Door Lock
Press the MENU / SELECT
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors. If you want to
override the delay you can press the
power door lock on the driver's door.
knob when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Vehicle Locator Lights is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Delayed Door Lock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-41
Locking Feedback
Remote Vehicle Start
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when unlocking
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
This allows the Remote Vehicle
Start to be turned on or off, if the
vehicle has this feature.
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
and the following will be displayed:
.
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
Press the MENU / SELECT
knob when Locking Feedback is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn
Only, or Off. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Vehicle Start is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
.
Locking Feedback
.
Door Unlock Options
.
Remote Vehicle Start
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
Return to Factory Settings
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Select Return to Factory
Door Unlock Options
Settings to return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Turn the knob to select Yes
or No. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Door Unlock Options is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors or Driver Door Only. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-42
Instruments and Controls
OnStar® System
How OnStar Service Works
1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
the glove box.
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
Automatic Crash Response
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation
and Hands‐Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all
OnStar services are available on
all vehicles. For more information
see the OnStar Owner's Guide
or visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see
if you need help.
available everywhere, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas, or at
all times.
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Your Responsibility
4-43
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
an OnStar call center when Q is
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy.
This information usually includes
the vehicle's GPS location and,
in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
Press Q and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑6 for more information.
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-44
Instruments and Controls
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal
Home Remote.
If the vehicle has this feature, you
will see these buttons with one
square Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light next to them in the
headliner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-45
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this
section.
2. At the same time, press and
hold both the hand-held
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
transmitter button and one
of the three Universal Home
Remote buttons to be used to
operate the garage door. Do not
release the Universal Home
Remote button or the hand-held
transmitter button until the
indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light.
You now may release both
buttons.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head
or gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
(1 to 3 inches) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by
the manufacturer of your
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-46
Instruments and Controls
3. Press and hold for five seconds
the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button (selected
button from Step 2) while
It may be helpful to have
another person to assist
with the remaining Steps 4
through 6.
5. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
observing the indicator light
and garage door activation.
6. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal
Home Remote button, selected
in Step 2 to control the garage
door, and then release it. If the
garage door does not move or
the lamp on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit) does not flash, press and
hold the same button a second
time for two seconds, and then
release it. Again, if the door
does not move or the garage
door lamp does not flash, press
and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, and then
release.
.
If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage
door starts to move when
the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed
and released, then the
programming is complete.
There is no need to
continue programming
Steps 4 through 6.
.
“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons
If the Universal Home
Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for
two seconds, then turns
to a constant light and the
garage door does not
move, continue with the
programming Steps 4
through 6.
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have
been completed, locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button inside
the garage on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). The name and color
of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
The Universal Home Remote should
now activate the garage door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-47
To program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons,
begin with Step 1 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote
System”.
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures,
regardless of where you live,
replace Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
Universal Remote System
Operation
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Home Remote button
for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System,
call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
2. Continue to press and hold
the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release
every two seconds (cycle) the
hand-held transmitter button
until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted
by the Universal Home Remote.
The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at
first and then rapidly. Proceed
with Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to
complete.
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be
long enough for Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold down the
two outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-48
Instruments and Controls
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Home Remote
Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Home Remote buttons:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Home Remote button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 of the section
“Programming Universal Home
Remote”.
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System,
call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com. You may also
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices on page 12‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-1
It controls the following systems:
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
.
Headlamps
.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Sidemarker Lamps
Exterior Lighting
.
Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Daytime Running
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
.
Fog Lamps
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
The exterior lamps control has four
positions:
9 (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control
off or on again. When released,
the control returns to the AUTO
position.
Interior Lighting
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel, on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Battery Load Management . . . . 5-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with
the following:
A warning chime sounds if the
driver's door is opened when the
ignition switch is off and the parking
lamps are on.
# (Front Fog Lamps): Push the
fog lamps button in to turn the fog
lamps on or off. The fog lamps
come on together with the following:
.
.
Parking Lamps
2 (Headlamps): Turns the
headlamps on together with the
following lamps listed below.
Parking Lamps
.
.
Taillamps
Taillamps
.
.
Sidemarker Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
.
Parking Lamps
.
.
License Plate Lamps
License Plate Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Sidemarker Lamps
AUTO also controls the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL), see Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) on
See Front Fog Lamps on
page 5‑5
.
License Plate Lamps
.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
page 5‑3
.
A warning chime sounds if the
driver's door is opened when the
ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
parking lamps on together with the
following:
.
Taillamps
.
Sidemarker Lamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-3
When the DRL are on, the
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
change lever away from you to turn
the high beams on.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel and other lamps
will not be on.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings.
The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
Pull the lever towards you to return
to low beams.
A light sensor on top of the
instrument panel makes the DRL
work, so be sure it is not covered.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will go off and the
DRL will come on.
The DRL system will make the
low‐beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness or for vehicles
with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the dedicated DRL
lights will come on when the
To turn the DRL lamps off or on
again, turn the exterior lamps
control to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the DRL lamps cannot be
turned off.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.
following conditions are met:
.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN
Flash-to-Pass
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
position.
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with
the low‐beams or Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on or off.
.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO, or has been briefly
turned to OFF to turn the
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever all the
way towards you. Then release it.
automatic light control on again.
.
The engine is running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Lighting
The vehicle has a light sensor
located on the top of the instrument
panel. Do not cover this sensor or
the system will come on whenever
the ignition is on.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately. If it
is light outside when the vehicle
leaves the garage, there will be a
slight delay before the automatic
headlamp system changes to
the DRL. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster may not be
as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control
is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑6.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside and
the headlamp switch is in AUTO,
the automatic headlamp system will
turn on the headlamps at the normal
brightness along with other lamps
such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, license plate lamps,
and the instrument panel lights.
The radio lights will also be dim.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition
between the daytime and nighttime
operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving
under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the
system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be
affected when the light sensor sees
a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
To turn off the automatic headlamp
system, turn the exterior lamps
switch to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the transmission must be
in the P (Park) position, before the
automatic headlamp system can be
turned off.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press this button located on the
instrument panel near the audio
system, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-5
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
The fog lamps come on together
with the parking and sidemarker
lamps.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Electrical System Overload on
For vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
replace the fog lamps.
page 9‑41
.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Front Fog Lamps
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior
lamp control, on the outboard side
of the steering wheel.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
The ignition must be turned to
ON/RUN to turn on the fog lamps.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps
on or off. An indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
when the fog lamps are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Lighting
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
Interior Lighting
Lighting Features
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
This feature controls the brightness
of the instrument panel lights.
The thumbwheel is located next
to the exterior lamp control.
Entry Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle
come on when any door is opened.
They stay on about 20 seconds and
when all of the doors have been
closed or the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN they gradually fade out.
They also come on when the unlock
symbol button is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system transmitter.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on
for about 20 seconds after the key is
removed from the ignition to provide
light as you exit.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamp buttons are located
in the overhead console.
To change the settings, press the
following:
Theater Dimming
This feature allows for a three to
five second fade out of the courtesy
lamps instead of immediately
turning off.
( (Off): Turns the lamp off, even
when a door is open.
1 (Door): The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
' (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-7
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays,
it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑28.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on,
such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
Battery Power Protection
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
This feature shuts off the dome
lamps if they are left on for more
than 10 minutes when the ignition is
in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
the battery from running down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Lighting
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-1
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 8‑3.
Introduction
Read the following pages
to become familiar with the
infotainment system features.
Infotainment
System
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
Introduction
WARNING
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
{
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could cause
a crash resulting in injury or
death to you or others. Do not
give extended attention to
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 6-13
The vehicle has Retained
entertainment tasks while driving.
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the infotainment system can play
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑19 for more
information.
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Phone
The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to
the infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved
to a different vehicle.
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 6-21
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Bluetooth (Voice
.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Infotainment System
C. Buttons 1 ‐ 6
Overview
.
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
D. FAV
.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
E. MENU/SELECT
.
Press: Opens the menus
and selects menu items.
.
Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values while
in a menu. Manually
selects radio stations while
listening to the radio.
F. RADIO/BAND
.
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
B. INFO
A. O /VOL
.
.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
.
Press: Turns the system
on or off.
.
Turn: Adjusts the volume.
.
CD/MP3: Shows available
information about the
current track.
G. Z CD Eject
.
Removes CD from slot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Operation
6-3
H. CD/AUX
K. CD Slot
.
.
Selects between the CD
Insert a CD.
Controls
player or a connected
external audio source.
L. l SEEK
The infotainment system is
.
operated by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, and menus
that are shown on the display, and
steering wheel controls, if equipped.
Radio: Seeks the next
I. PHONE
station.
.
Opens the phone
main menu.
.
CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
.
Mutes the audio system.
Turning the System On or Off
J. g SEEK
M. CONFIG
O VOL (Power/Volume): Press to
turn the system on and off.
.
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
Opens the settings menu.
station.
Automatic Off
N. TONE
.
CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
.
If the infotainment system has
been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system turns off
automatically after ten minutes.
Opens the tone menu.
O. 0 BACK
.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Infotainment System
MENU/SELECT: Press to:
Selecting a Menu Option
Volume Control
.
Enter the menu system.
O VOL (Power/Volume): Turn to
adjust the volume.
.
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
PHONE: For vehicles with
OnStar®, press and hold PHONE
to mute the infotainment system.
Press and hold PHONE again,
.
Confirm a set value.
.
Switch a system setting on
or off.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
move the highlighted bar.
or turn the O VOL to cancel mute.
Turn to:
For vehicles without OnStar®, press
PHONE to mute the infotainment
system. Press PHONE again,
.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the highlighted option.
Highlight a menu option.
.
Select a value.
or turn the O VOL to cancel mute.
Submenus
0 BACK: Press to:
.
Menu System
Exit a menu.
.
Controls
Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
The MENU/SELECT knob and
.
Delete the last character in a
sequence.
the 0 BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-5
Activating a Setting
Turning a Function On or Off
Press the 0 BACK button to delete
the last character or press and hold
0 BACK to delete the entire
character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the setting.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the function.
To adjust the audio setting, press
the TONE button and select the
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to activate the setting.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to turn the function on or off.
audio setting. Press the 0 BACK
button to go back to the Tone
Settings menu.
Setting a Value
Entering a Character Sequence
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Highlight the option.
2. Press and hold the MENU/
SELECT knob until the value
changes to 0.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
change the current value of the
setting.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the character.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the character.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to confirm the setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Infotainment System
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
3. Select Radio Favorites.
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Auto Volume
1. Select Treble, Midrange,
or Bass.
The auto volume feature
1. Select EQ.
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent
2. Select the setting.
2. Select the value.
System Settings
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
1. Select Fader or Balance.
2. Select the value.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-7
Maximum Startup Volume
Radio
The maximum volume played when
the radio is first turned on can
be set.
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
g SEEK/ l SEEK: Press to
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
search for stations.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
1‐6: Press to select preset stations.
4. Select the setting
MENU/SELECT: Turn to manually
search for stations.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Infotainment System
Manual Tuning
RDS (Radio Data System)
Selecting a Band
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
select the frequency on the display.
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Press the RADIO/BAND button
to choose AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again.
Favorites List
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Favorites List.
3. Select the station.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK
to automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
Station Lists
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select AM or FM Station List.
All receivable stations in the
current reception area are
displayed. If no station list has
been created an automatic
station search is done.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Radio Menus
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK until the station on the
display is reached, then release
the button.
Radio menus are available for AM,
FM and XM, if equipped.
3. Select the station.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob to
open the main radio menu for that
frequency.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-9
Updating Station & Category Lists
To search for a programing type
determined by station:
Storing a Station as a Favorite
If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
numeric button 1‐6 until the station
can be heard again.
1. Select FM category list. A list of
all programing types available
displays.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in
the station list are no longer
received. A station search will be
completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
2. Select the programing type.
A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
Retrieving Stations
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1‐6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
3. Select the station.
To cancel the station search, press
the MENU/SELECT knob.
The category lists are updated when
the corresponding station lists are
updated.
Satellite Radio
Category Lists
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
Storing and Retrieving
Favorites
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS PTY code specify the type of
programming transmitted. Some
stations change the PTY code
depending on the content. The
system stores the RDS stations,
sorted by program type, in the FM
category list.
Stations from all bands can be
stored in the favorite lists in any
order.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Infotainment System
Removing or Adding Categories
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select XM Categories.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Control Buttons
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio
has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for
when you are not in the vehicle.
A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. For more
The buttons used to control the XM
radio are:
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
3. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the category.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to remove or add the category.
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to
search for stations.
Selecting an XM Station
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
XM stations can be selected by
using g SEEK, l SEEK, the
MENU/SELECT knob, or the menu
system.
1‐6: Press to select preset stations.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to search for
stations.
information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call
To select an XM station using
g SEEK or l SEEK, do one of
the following:
Selecting the XM Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose between the AM, FM, and
XM bands. The last station played in
that band begins to play when that
band is selected.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
.
Press and release g SEEK or
l SEEK to go to the previous
or next station.
.
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK to scroll through the
previous or next stations until
the station is reached.
XM Categories
XM stations are organized in
categories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-11
To select an XM station using the
MENU/SELECT knob:
Storing and Retrieving
Favorites
XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight an XM station.
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the station, or leave the
station highlighted.
XM Updating: The encryption code
is being updated, no action is
required.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
To select a station using the menu:
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select XM Stations List.
3. Select the station.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data, no action is needed.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
To store the station to a position
in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1‐6 button until
the station can be heard again.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service.
Selecting a Station by Category
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
the XM Subscription package.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
Retrieving stations
2. Select XM Category List. A list of
all programing types available
displays.
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1‐6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned.
3. Select the programing type.
4. Select the station.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
Infotainment System
No CAT Info: No category
information is available.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available.
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer.
No XM Signal: The vehicle may be
in a location that where the XM
signal is being blocked. When the
vehicle is moved, the signal should
return.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
AM
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle may have been in
another vehicle. XM receivers
cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received
after having the vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the XM
Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-13
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside
rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Backglass Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio
reception, the antenna connector
needs to be properly attached to
the post on the glass.
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will not
be covered by the vehicle
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between
the grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on.
This interference can cause an
increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the
radio, unplug the cellular phone
and turn it off.
warranty.
Satellite Radio Antenna
For vehicles with XM™ Satellite
Radio Service, the antenna is
located on the decklid of the
vehicle. Keep the antenna clear
of obstructions for clear radio
reception.
interfering with radio reception.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
Infotainment System
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
the disc from the center to the
outer edge.
Control Buttons
Audio Players
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
CD Player
The CD player can play audio CDs
and MP3 CDs.
CD/AUX: Press to choose between
the CD and AUX player.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD player.
If a label is needed, label the top
of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
The CD player will not play 8 cm
(3 inches) CDs.
Care of CDs
MENU/SELECT: Turn to select
tracks.
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD player.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the CD that may
be available.
Z (Eject): Press to remove
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
the CD.
Inserting a CD
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-15
Using the CD Menu:
Using the CD Menu:
Removing a CD
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Tracks list.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Playlists / Folders.
3. Select the play list or folder.
4. Select the track.
Press the Z button.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
3. Select the track.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Searching for MP3 Tracks
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read.
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press the CD/AUX button if there
is a disc in the player, it begins
playing.
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
within the current track.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Tracks can be searched by:
Using the control buttons:
.
Playlists
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
.
Selecting a CD Track
Artists
.
Using the control buttons:
Albums
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
counterclockwise or clockwise to
select the previous or next track.
.
Song Titles
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
.
Genres
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
counterclockwise or clockwise to
select the previous or next track.
.
Folder View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
Infotainment System
To search for tracks:
Adjusting the Volume
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Turn the VOL O knob to adjust the
volume of the Infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
USB Port
4. Select the track.
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
Auxiliary Devices
The AUX Input allows portable
devices to connect to the vehicle
using the 3.5mm (1/8 in) input
jack, the USB port, if equipped,
or Bluetooth® wireless technology,
if equipped.
.
iPod's
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
.
PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
.
3.5mm Jack
USB Drives
.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Zune's
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑3.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the Infotainment System.
Connecting an iPod
Connect the iPod to the USB port
using the cable that came with the
device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-17
Searching For a Track
Shuffle
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
Tracks can be searched for by:
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
.
Playlists
or Off, then press the 0 BACK
button to return the main screen.
Connecting a PFD or Zune
.
Artists
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port using the cable that came
with the device.
.
Albums
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
.
Song Titles
.
Podcasts
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
Searching For a Track
.
Genres
Tracks can be searched for by:
Repeat
.
Audiobooks
.
Playlists
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off, then press
.
Composers
.
Artists
To search for tracks:
.
Albums
the 0 BACK button to return the
main screen.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
.
Song Titles
.
On: Repeats the current track.
Podcasts
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
.
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
Genres
To search for tracks:
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
4. Select the track.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres
4. Select the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
Infotainment System
Shuffle Functionality
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
.
.
.
.
.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Playlists*
Artists
Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Albums
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
Song Titles
Genres
Repeat Functionality
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off.
Folder View
Connecting a USB Drive
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Connect the USB drive to the USB
port using the cable that came with
the device.
To search for tracks:
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Searching For a Track
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-19
Shuffle Functionality
system. Before pairing the Bluetooth
device, become familiar with its
user guide for Bluetooth functions.
The system only connects to
Bluetooth devices that support
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) version 1.2.
Bluetooth Setup Menu
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
The Bluetooth Setup menu can be
accessed with or without a device
attached to the USB port.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
To select the Bluetooth Setup menu
when a device is attached to the
USB port and active:
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Pairing Information:
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
while in the iPod, Zune, PFD,
or USB device main menu.
.
Up to five devices can be paired
Repeat Functionality
to the system.
.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off.
The pairing process is disabled
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
when the vehicle is moving.
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
menu when a device is not attached
to the USB port, or when a device is
attached to the USB port but not
active:
.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
The infotainment system
automatically links with the first
available paired device in the
order the device was paired.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Connecting a Bluetooth®
Device
.
Only one paired device can be
connected to the infotainment
system at a time.
1. Press the CD/AUX button until
AUX is the active source.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
3. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
.
Pairing should only need to be
Before a Bluetooth device can be
connected to the infotainment
system, it must first be paired to the
system. Not all Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the infotainment
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the device is
deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-20
Infotainment System
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
menu when a Bluetooth device is
connected and active:
4. Some devices may require a
PIN number in order to complete
the pairing process. Locate the
device named “GMusicConnect”
in the list on the Bluetooth
device and follow the
To connect a paired device when
another device is connected to the
Infotainment System:
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
Pairing a Device
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
instructions on the device to
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the Infotainment
System.
2. Select the new device.
1. Select Connect To New Device
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
3. The active device is
disconnected from the system
and the new device is
connected.
Connecting to a Device
2. The system asks a series of
Yes/No questions to determine
what type of device is being
paired.
Once a device is paired to the
Infotainment System, it can be
connected to the Infotainment
System.
Removing a Device
1. Select Remove Device from the
Bluetooth Music Setup menu.
3. After the system determines
what type of Bluetooth device
is being paired, the Bluetooth
device will need to be put into
discovery mode.
To connect a paired device when no
other device is connected to the
Infotainment System:
2. Select the device.
3. The device is removed from the
system.
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
Before connecting to the removed
device again, it will need to paired
to the Infotainment System.
2. Select the new device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-21
Controlling a Bluetooth®
Device
Changing the Default PIN
Phone
To change the default PIN:
Bluetooth devices that support
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote
Control Profile) version 1.0 may
be able to be controlled by the
Infotainment System.
Bluetooth (Overview)
1. Select Change Default PIN
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile
to make and receive phone calls.
The infotainment system and voice
recognition are used to control
the system. The system can be
used while in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones
support all functions and not all
phones work with the Bluetooth
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
for more information about
2. Select one of the pre‐defined
PIN numbers, or select Other to
create a PIN.
Press and release g SEEK /
l SEEK to skip tracks. Press and
hold g SEEK / l SEEK to fast
forward or fast reverse within a
track.
To create a PIN:
1. Select the length of the PIN
number.
2. Enter the character sequence.
Other Information
Messages
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
The following messages may
appear on the infotainment screen.
Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:
This message displays when the
Bluetooth signal strength is low.
compatible phones.
Bluetooth Controls
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑17 for FCC information.
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
This Feature is Unavailable While
Vehicle is Moving: This message
displays when an action is not
allowed while the vehicle is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-22
Infotainment System
Steering Wheel Controls
Voice Recognition
Other Information
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
voice recognition.
The voice recognition system is
used to interpret commands that
control the system and dial phone
numbers.
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
c / $ (End Call / Mute): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑17 for FCC information.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
Infotainment System Controls
MENU/SELECT: Press and turn
to navigate the menu screens.
See Operation on page 6‑3 for
more information.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Pairing
PHONE: Press to enter the Phone
main menu.
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
See the cell phone manufacturer
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a
Bluetooth phone is not connected,
calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available.
Refer to the OnStar owner's guide
for more information.
Audio System
CONFIG: Press to enter the
System Configuration menu.
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system.
Use the audio system volume knob,
during a call, to change the volume
level. The adjusted volume level
remains in memory for later calls.
The system maintains a minimum
volume level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-23
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can not be connected to
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
5. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturer user guide
for information on this process.
Pairing a Phone
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four digit PIN number
that appears on the infotainment
display.
Pairing Information:
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four digit PIN number appears
on the display.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
If the “Add new GPS device”
option is selected, the system
will start a search for Bluetooth
“Handsfree” profile devices just
like if “Add new Phone” was
selected. The additional GPS
location feature which would
provide the vehicle's GPS
location through the Bluetooth
Serial Port Profile is not
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. Use a name
that best describes the phone.
This name will be used to
.
The Bluetooth system
automatically links with the first
available paired cell phone in
the order the phone was paired.
indicate which phone is
connected. The system then
confirms the name provided.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
7. The system responds “<Phone
name> has been successfully
paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
available.
.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-24
Infotainment System
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
Making a Call
Call Waiting
1. Press the PHONE button twice.
2. Select Enter number.
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Accepting a Call
3. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
4. Select Device List submenu.
Sequence” in the Operation on
page 6‑3 for more information.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Answer” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to accept the
incoming call.
Deleting a Paired Phone
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
Declining a Call
Accepting or Declining an
Incoming Call
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Decline” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to decline the
incoming call.
3. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
4. Select Device List submenu.
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
5. Select the phone to be deleted
and then follow the on screen
prompts.
Switching Between Calls
Accepting a Call
To switch between calls:
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Answer” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to accept the
incoming call.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
3. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
4. Select Device List submenu.
Declining a Call
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Decline” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to decline the
incoming call.
5. Select the new phone and then
follow the on screen prompts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-25
Conference Calling
Ending a Call
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition)
Conference calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
select Hang Up.
Pairing
Muting a Call
To Mute a Call
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturer user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
select Mute Call.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
and select Enter Number.
To Cancel Mute
2. Enter the character sequence
then select call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in the
Operation on page 6‑3 for
more information.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
deselect Mute Call.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
3. After the call has been placed,
press the MENU/SELECT knob
and choose Merge Calls.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
4. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat steps 1
through 3. The number of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
and select Enter Number.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence” in the Operation on
page 6‑3 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-26
Infotainment System
Pairing Information:
Pairing a Phone
5. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phone is
connected. The system confirms
the name.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
6. The system responds “<Phone
name> has been successfully
paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
4. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturer user guide
for information on this process.
.
Pairing should only need to be
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
Locate the device named
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
“General Motors” in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four‐digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
The system will respond
“is connected” if a phone is
connected to the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Storing Name Tags
6-27
Deleting a Paired Phone
Linking to a Different Phone
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags that
are shared between the Bluetooth
and OnStar systems.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds “Please wait
while I search for other phones”.
.
Store
.
.
Digit Store
Directory
.
4. Say the name of the phone
to be deleted. If the phone
name is unknown, use the “List”
command for a list of all paired
phones. The system responds
“Would you like to delete <phone
name>? Yes or No” followed by
a tone.
If another phone is found,
the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a
phone number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
.
If another phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
The system responds “OK,
deleting <phone name>”.
2. Say “Store”. The system
responds “Store, number please”
followed by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-28
Infotainment System
3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back the
digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
recorded and the system
responds “About to store <name
tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
.
If the system recognizes
the number the response is
“OK, Storing”.
.
.
If the name tag does not
If an unwanted number is
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
.
If the system does not
recognizes the phone
number, the response is
“Store <Phone number>”.
“Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct,
say “Yes”. If the number
is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for
the number again.
.
If the name tag sounds
.
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
4. After the complete number
has been entered, say “Store”.
The system responds “Please
say the name tag” followed by
a tone.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a
phone number to be stored by
entering the digits individually.
4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds
“Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds “Please say the first
digit to store” followed by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-29
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
Using the Directory Command
Using the Delete Command
The directory command lists all of
the name tags stored by the system.
To use the directory command:
The delete command is used to
delete specific name tags.
recorded and the system
responds “About to store <name
tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
To delete name tags:
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
.
1. Say “Delete”. The system
responds “Delete, please say
the name tag” followed by
a tone.
If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds “Directory” and lists all
stored name tags. The system
returns to the main menu when
the list is complete.
.
If the name tag sounds
2. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds “Would
you like to delete, <name tag>?
Please say yes or no”.
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
.
If the name tag is correct,
Deleting Name Tags
say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system
responds “OK, deleting
<name tag>, returning to
the main menu.”
The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:
.
Delete
.
Delete all name tags
.
If the name tag is incorrect,
say “No”. The system
responds “No. OK, let's try
again, please say the
name tag.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-30
Infotainment System
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
.
The delete all name tags command
deletes all stored phone book name
tags and route name tags for
OnStar if stored.
If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
“OK, Dialing” and dials the
number.
.
Dial
.
Digit Dial
.
.
Call
To delete all name tags:
If the system does not
recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is
not correct, say “No”.
.
Re‐dial
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
Using the Dial Command
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”.
The system responds “You are
about to delete all name tags
stored in your phone directory
and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you
want to do this? Please say
yes or no.”
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Dial using <phone name>.
“Number please” followed by
a tone.
The system will ask for
the number again.
.
Say “Yes” to delete all
name tags.
.
Say “No” to cancel the
function and return to the
main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-31
Using the Digit Dial Command
Using the Call Command
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
Using the Re‐dial Command
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds “Digit dial using
<phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds
“Call using <phone name>.
Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”.
The system responds “Re‐dial
using <phone name>” and dials
the last number called from the
connected Bluetooth phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
3. Say the digits to be dialed one
at a time. The system repeats
back the digit it heard followed
by a tone.
.
If the system recognizes
the name tag it responds
“OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The
system responds “OK, Dialing”
and dials the number.
.
If the system does not
recognize the name tag,
it confirms the name tag
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number. If the
name tag is not correct, say
“No”. The system will ask
for the name tag again.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
.
Press b g to answer the call.
.
Press c $ to ignore a call.
.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-32
Infotainment System
Call Waiting
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Three‐Way Calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
To Mute a call
1. While on a call press b g.
The system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The
system responds “Three‐way
call, please say dial or call”.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds “Call muted”.
.
To ignore the incoming call, no
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
action is required.
To Cancel Mute
.
Press c $ to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b g to link all the callers
together.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds
Ending a Call
“Resuming call”.
Press c $ to end a call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-33
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell
Phone
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
During a call with the audio on the
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
cell phone, press b g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle.
.
The cell phone's normal
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
responds “Transferring call” and
the audio transfers to the cell
phone.
Voice Pass-Thru
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturer user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and the numbers
stored as name tags during a call.
Use this feature when calling a
menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can also be stored for use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-34
Infotainment System
Sending a Number During a Call
Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out
of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in
the phonebook and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
above sections on Deleting a Paired
Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Say a number to send tones”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The
system responds “Say a name
tag to send tones” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system recognizes
3. Say the name tag to send.
the number it responds
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
.
If the system recognizes
the number it responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
.
If the system does not
recognize the number it
responds “Dial Number,
please say yes or no?”
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
.
If the system does not
recognize the name tag it
responds “Dial <name tag>,
please say yes or no?”
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-1
Climate Control Systems
The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can be
controlled with this system.
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
A. Fan Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase
or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to O to turn the fan off.
B. Heated Seats
C. Temperature Control
D. Air Delivery Mode Controls
E. Air Conditioning
F. Defrost
Temperature Control: Turn
to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Maximum cooling occurs when
the temperature knob is turned to
G. Rear Window Defogger
H. Recirculation
MAX # and the air conditioning
system is turned on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: To
change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Air Conditioning
Rear Window Defogger
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning on or off.
An indicator light turns on. If the
fan is turned off or the outside
temperature falls below freezing,
the air conditioning will not work.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to
turn the rear window defogger on
or off. The rear window defogger
turns off automatically after about
12 minutes. It can also be turned
off by turning the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
If turned on again it runs for about
6 minutes before turning off. At
higher vehicle speeds, the rear
defogger can stay on continuously.
F (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and the
floor outlets.
The air conditioning might
automatically come on when 0 is
selected.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
) (Recirculation): Press to turn
on the recirculation. An indicator
light comes on. Air is recirculated
inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle or
prevent outside air and odors from
entering.
W (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window
outlets.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Operation in the recirculation
mode while the air conditioner is
off increases humidity and may
cause the windows to fog.
For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Recirculation is not available in the
defrost or defog modes.
L / M (Heated Seats): Press to
turn on or off. See Heated Front
Seats on page 2‑6.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-3
.
.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter
Air Vents
Use the air outlets located in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel to direct the
airflow. Use the thumbwheels
near the center air outlets to direct
airflow to the left or right.
The passenger compartment air
filter removes most of the pollen
and dust from the air that enters
the vehicle. The filter will need
to be replaced periodically.
Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
Operation Tips
page 10‑2
.
.
In defog or defrost mode, warm
Using the climate control system
without an air filter installed is not
recommended. Water or other
debris could enter the system and
result in leaks or noises. Always
install a new filter when removing
the old filter.
air flows from the some air
outlets. To improve side window
defogging or defrosting, direct
side air outlets towards the side
windows.
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Manual Transmission
8-1
Starting and Operating
Driving and
Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-17
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Retained Accessory
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 8-30
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Active Fuel
Management™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 8-9
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-12
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Competitive Driving Mode . . . 8-37
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 8-38
Engine Exhaust
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-41
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-26
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Driving and Operating
.
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
Fuel
Driving Information
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-44
California Fuel
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving
tips to get the best fuel economy
possible.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-45
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Filling a Portable Fuel
.
.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
smoothly.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
.
periods of time.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-3
Police records show that
Defensive Driving
Drunk Driving
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
WARNING
{
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
page 2‑7
.
WARNING
{
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
.
Allow enough following
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Driving and Operating
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system
can make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑23
.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding
to push the brake pedal is
perception time. Actually doing
it is reaction time.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft).
That could be a lot of distance
in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between the
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes
might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear
out much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
page 8‑35
.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑4.
vehicle and others is important.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-5
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Steering Tips
Steering in Emergencies
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
There are times when steering
can be more effective than braking.
For example, you come over a hill
and find a truck stopped in your
lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out
from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
page 9‑4
.
The vehicle can perform very
well in emergencies like these.
First apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 8‑4. It is better to remove
as much speed as possible from
a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Driving and Operating
if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the
edge of the pavement. Turn the
steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to
5 inches), about one-eighth turn,
until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then,
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Competitive Driving
Competitive driving may affect the
vehicle warranty. See the warranty
book before using the vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving.
8-7
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The new vehicle break‐in must be
performed before the vehicle is
used for competitive driving. See
New Vehicle Break-In on page 8‑17.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Notice: If you use your vehicle
for competitive driving, the
systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
engine may use more oil than it
would with normal use. Low oil
levels can damage the engine.
Be sure to check the oil level
often during competitive driving
and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper
operating range on the engine oil
dipstick. For information on how
to add oil, see Engine Oil on
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you
want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
page 9‑10
.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
For competitive driving, it is
recommended that the brake fluid
be replaced with a high performance
brake fluid that has a dry boiling
point greater than 279°C (534°F).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Driving and Operating
After conversion to the high
performance brake fluid,
follow the brake fluid service
recommendations outlined by the
fluid manufacturer. Do not use
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids.
Driving on Wet Roads
WARNING (Continued)
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
If the vehicle is used for racing,
competitive driving, sustained high
speed , or events that generate
excessive wheel slip, the rear axle
fluid temperatures will be higher
than would occur in normal driving.
We recommend that the rear axle
fluid be drained and refilled with
new fluid after every six hours
of racing or competitive driving.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8 for what
fluid to use.
WARNING
{
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Regularly inspect the driveshaft/
propshaft couplings and halfshaft
boots for cracking or grease
leakage. It is not recommended that
the vehicle be used for ongoing race
track/competitive driving.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
8-9
.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
equipment in good shape.
WARNING
.
{
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.
page 9‑49
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Turn off cruise control.
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
WARNING
{
If you do not shift down, the
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in
your own lane.
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
(Continued)
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Driving and Operating
.
Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12‑6
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
.
surface under the tires even more.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 8‑31 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
Winter Driving
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain
icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
flashers.
Driving on Snow or Ice
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
WARNING
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-11
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
.
Check again from time to
Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside
the vehicle and set the fan
speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System
in the Index.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
Driving and Operating
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries,
it might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label
and the Certification label.
WARNING
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and
you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment
fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and
avoid going above 55 km/h
(35 mph) as shown on the
speedometer.
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑71.
page 9‑90
.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-13
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
WARNING (Continued)
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 9‑49 and
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
Tire Pressure on page 9‑56
.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-14
Driving and Operating
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
See Trailer Towing on page 8‑53
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Example 1
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-15
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver door
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
above the latch mechanism.
The label tells the gross weight
capacity of the vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16
Driving and Operating
the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for
the vehicle, or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
.
Never stack heavier
If you put things inside the
vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is
a crash, they will keep going.
And, if there is a heavy load,
it should be spread out. See
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
.
.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
WARNING
{
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
(GVWR), or either the
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-17
.
.
.
Avoid downshifting to brake
or slow the vehicle when the
engine speed will exceed
4000 RPM.
To break in new tires, drive at
moderate speeds and avoid
hard cornering for the first
322 km/200 miles. New tires
do not have maximum
Starting and
Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Follow these
recommended guidelines during
the first 2 414 km/1,500 miles of
driving this vehicle. Parts have a
break‐in period and performance
will be better in the long run.
Do not let the engine labor.
Never lug the engine in high
gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to
the next lower gear. This rule
applies at all times, not just
during the break‐in period.
traction and may tend to slip.
.
New brake linings also need
a break‐in period. Avoid
making hard stops during
the first 322 km/200 miles.
This is recommended every
time brake linings are
replaced.
.
.
Do not participate in racing
events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities
during this break‐in period.
.
For the first 2 414 km/
1,500 miles:
.
Should the vehicle be used
for racing or competitive
driving (after break‐in), the
rear axle lubricant must be
replaced before hand.
.
Avoid full throttle starts and
abrupt stops.
Check engine oil with
.
Do not exceed
every refueling and add
if necessary. Oil and fuel
consumption may be higher
than normal during the first
2 414 km/1,500 miles.
4,000 engine rpm.
.
Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow.
.
Do not drive above 160 km/h
(100 mph).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18
Driving and Operating
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only
position from which the key can be
removed. This locks the steering
wheel, ignition and automatic
transmission.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
Ignition Positions
ventilation fan and 12 volt power
outlet, as well as to display some
warning and indicator lights.
On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK/OFF position.
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the
battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
D (START) : This position starts
the engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This
position provides power to some of
the electrical accessories. It unlocks
the steering wheel and ignition.
The transmission is also unlocked
in this position on automatic
transmission vehicles. To move
the key from ACC/ACCESSORY
to LOCK/OFF, push in the key and
then turn it to LOCK/OFF.
A warning tone sounds when the
driver door is opened if the ignition
is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
key is in the ignition.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Starting the Engine
8-19
If charging or jump starting the
battery does not work, remove the
plug covering the hole below the
ignition lock. Insert a screwdriver
into the opening as far as it will go
and remove the key from the
ignition.
Key Lock Release
Place the transmission in the
proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
.
Audio System
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic key lock release system.
The key lock release is designed to
prevent ignition key removal unless
the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
Power Windows
Manual Transmission
The power windows will continue to
work for up to 10 minutes or until
any door is opened. The radio will
work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
the radio will continue to work for
10 minutes, or until the driver door is
opened or the key is removed from
the ignition.
The shift lever should be in
N (Neutral) and the parking brake
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
down to the floor and start the
engine. The vehicle will not start
if the clutch pedal is not all the
way down.
The key lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery. If the vehicle has an
uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump
starting the battery. See Jump
Starting on page 9‑86.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20
Driving and Operating
Starting Procedure
cranking stops after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch
to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
you hold the key in START for a
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each
try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the
procedure. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed
will go down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held
in START for many seconds,
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below 0°F or
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
−18°C), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-21
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
WARNING (Continued)
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep
it away from moving engine
parts. If you do not it could be
damaged.
The electrical cord is located on
the passenger side of the engine
compartment, in front of the
underhood fuse block for
V6 models.
To Use The Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
WARNING
{
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-22
Driving and Operating
2. Hold the button on the shift lever
and push the lever toward the
front of the vehicle into P (Park).
Release the button and check that
the shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park).
Shifting Into Park
WARNING
{
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key.
Torque Lock
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑49.
Torque lock is when the weight of
the vehicle puts too much force
on the parking pawl in the
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously.
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
If torque lock does occur, the
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park):
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑32 for more information.
If you have to leave the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle
must be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-23
To shift out of P (Park):
gear selector can be moved from
the P (Park) position. If the battery
has lost power, the selector cannot
be moved from P (Park) unless
the shift lock manual release is
disengaged manually.
Shifting Out of Park
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
This vehicle is equipped with
an electronic shift lock release
system. The shift lock release is
designed to:
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
.
Prevent ignition key removal
To access the shift lock manual
release:
If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released.
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
1. Apply the park brake.
.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless
the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the
brake pedal is applied.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the shift lever still cannot be
moved from P (Park), see Shift Lock
Manual Release.
Shift Lock Manual Release
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
The transmission has an electric
park lock called a shift lock manual
release. The key must be in the
ON/RUN position, and the brake
pedal pressed so the transmission
2. Pull the passenger side console
trim away from the front half of
the console to expose the shifter
mechanism.
page 9‑86
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-24
Driving and Operating
7. After the vehicle has been
moved, align the shift lock
manual release cover plate
and install the retainer so the
automatic transmission can
operate properly.
has been placed into R (Reverse)
with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key and release the
clutch.
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
8. Place the console trim panel in
the original position, aligning the
fasteners on the trim panel with
the slots in the console. Press
in the side trim until it clicks in
place.
page 8‑49
.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
3. Remove the retainer and the
shift lock manual release cover.
The transmission selector locks
if it is moved back to the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
{
4. Push and hold the manual
release lever toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Parking
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
parking brake. Once the shift lever
5. Press the select button and
move the transmission gear
selector to the N (Neutral)
position.
6. Release the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-25
Active Fuel
Management™
Vehicles with V8 engines and an
automatic transmission have Active
Fuel Management™. This system
allows the engine to operate on
either all or half of its cylinders,
depending on the driving conditions.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING (Continued)
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
WARNING
{
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
When less power is required, such
as cruising at a constant vehicle
speed, the system will operate in
the half cylinder mode, allowing
the vehicle to achieve better fuel
economy. When greater power
demands are required, such as
accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the
system will maintain full-cylinder
operation.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
WARNING
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑22.
P (Park): This position locks the
rear wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑49.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-27
system. The regular brake must be
fully applied first and then the shift
lever button pressed before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever, then push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
WARNING
{
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless
you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
WARNING
{
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
page 8‑23
.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
page 8‑22. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑49.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-28
Driving and Operating
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the
best fuel economy. If more power
is needed for passing, and the
vehicle is:
If the brake is released for some
time, the transmission will upshift a
gear. If the road levels out and the
accelerator pedal is pressed, the
transmission will upshift until the
appropriate gear is reached.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away.
.
Going less than 35 mph
(56 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
4 (Fourth) Gear Hold (V6 Engine)
M (Manual Mode): This position
allows the driver to select the range
of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions.
If, during highway driving, you
wish to pass another vehicle, but
then change your mind (quickly
pushing the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and then
immediately releasing the pedal),
the transmission will shift to a lower
gear and then upshift to 4 (Fourth).
This leaves the transmission
prepared with increased
responsiveness for additional driver
input. The passing maneuver can
then be resumed from 4 (Fourth)
gear, or 4 (Fourth) gear hold can be
canceled by lightly pressing on the
accelerator pedal.
.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
In M (Manual Mode) the
Powertrain Braking (V8 and
V6 Engines)
transmission will shift as an
automatic until the Tap Shift controls
are used. Tap Shift activates driver
manual gear selection.
When driving on steep descents in
D (Drive) or M (Manual Mode) where
frequent braking is required, the
transmission will shift down a gear
to help hold vehicle speed and
reduce brake wear. If the driver
continues to press the brake, the
transmission will downshift until
3 (Third) gear is reached.
While driving in M (Manual Mode),
if Tap Shift has not been activated,
the transmission determines when
the vehicle is being driven in a
competitive manner and will select
and hold the transmission in lower
gears and have more noticeable
upshifts for sportier vehicle
performance.
See Manual Mode on page 8‑29 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-29
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
When coasting to a stop, the
Manual Mode
V6 transmission will automatically
downshift to 1 (First) gear, and the
V8 transmission will automatically
downshift to 2 (Second) gear.
A 1 (First) gear start can be selected
using the Tap Shift controls on
V8 models When accelerating from
a stop the transmissions will hold
these gears until the driver manually
selects higher gears using the Tap
Shift controls.
Tap Shift
on page 4‑28
.
While using the Tap Shift feature,
the vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting for increased performance.
You can use this for sport driving or
when climbing or descending hills,
to stay in gear longer, or to down
shift for more power or engine
braking. The transmission will
only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed
and engine Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM). The transmission will not
automatically shift to the next higher
gear if the engine RPM is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any
reason, the message Shift Denied
will appear in the DIC, indicating
that the transmission has not
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you
to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
Back of steering wheel
Tap Shift allows the driver to
manually control the automatic
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
shift lever must be in M (Manual
Mode). Vehicles with this feature
have indicators on the steering
wheel. The controls are on the
back of the steering wheel. Tap the
left control to downshift, and the
right control to upshift. A Driver
shifted gears. While in the Tap Shift
mode, the transmission will not
automatically downshift on hard
acceleration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-30
Driving and Operating
Shift Pattern (V6 Engine)
and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift
into 1 (First).
Manual Transmission
Shift Pattern (V8 Engines)
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the
same way you do for 2 (Second).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
These are the shift patterns for the
six-speed manual transmissions.
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
To operate the transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
Neutral: Use this position
when you start or idle the engine.
The shift lever is in Neutral when it
is centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
You can shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 64 km/h
(40 mph). If you come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into
1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-31
R (Reverse): To back up, press
down the clutch pedal and shift
into R (Reverse). On V8 models,
apply pressure to get the lever
past 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) into
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
2 (Second). The message will be
displayed in the Driver Information
Center.
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
You must complete the shift into
4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
This helps you get the best possible
fuel economy.
This vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
After shifting to 4 (Fourth), you may
downshift to a lower gear if you
prefer.
One to Four Shift Light
Message (V8 Only)
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
Notice: Forcing the shift lever
into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT message
comes on may damage the
transmission. Shift only from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
message comes on.
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
This message will come on when:
.
The engine coolant temperature
is higher than 76°C (169°F),
.
The vehicle is going 24 to
Driver Information Center
31 km/h (15 to 19 mph) and
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
.
When this message comes on,
you can only shift from 1 (First) to
4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
The vehicle is at 21 percent
throttle or less.
on page 4‑24
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-32
Driving and Operating
If driving safely on a wet road
and it becomes necessary to slam
on the brakes and continue braking
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately work
the brakes at each wheel.
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Parking Brake
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
To apply the parking brake, pull up
on the parking brake handle. It is
not necessary to push in on the
release button while applying the
parking brake. If the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position, the brake
system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
on page 4‑23
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-33
To release the parking brake:
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause a warning chime
to sound and the Park Brake
message to appear in the DIC.
The message will remain on until:
control module to supplement
the power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
2. Pull the parking brake handle up
until you can press the release
button.
.
the parking brake is released
3. Hold the release button in as
you move the brake handle all
the way down.
.
the vehicle comes to a stop.
If you are towing a trailer and you
are parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
page 8‑49
.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the
driver in stopping or decreasing
vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-34
Driving and Operating
should always be left on, but it may
be necessary to turn the system off
if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud
or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. Also, turn TCS off while
in deep snow or on loose gravel,
to assist vehicle motion at lower
speeds. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 8‑12 for more information.
See also Winter Driving on
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
The system utilizes engine and
braking controls to control wheel
spin during acceleration at all
driving speeds for maximum driver
control regardless of conditions.
When the system senses impending
wheel slip during acceleration, it
signals the throttle control to reduce
drive wheel torque. Under extreme
situations, such as going from
pavement to ice during acceleration,
the system will selectively apply
the brakes to maintain control.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
flashes when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin.
The StabiliTrak/TCS warning light
comes on solid if there is a problem
with the traction control system.
See Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light on page 4‑25 for
more information. If the light stays
on, see your dealer for service.
When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
page 8‑10 for information on using
TCS when driving in snowy or icy
conditions.
To turn the system off, press and
release the StabiliTrak/TCS button
located on the console in front of the
shift lever.
TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-35
StabiliTrak System
The vehicle has an electronic
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Press and release the StabiliTrak/
TCS button and the traction control
system turns off and the TCS
warning light comes on. Press and
release the button again to turn the
system back on. For information on
turning StabiliTrak off and on, see
StabiliTrak System following.
The StabiliTrak/TCS button is
located in front of the shift lever.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any
one of the vehicle's brakes to help
steer the vehicle in the direction
which you are steering.
When the system activates, the
StabiliTrak/Traction Control System
(TCS) warning light flashes on the
instrument panel cluster. You may
also hear a noise or feel vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
Press the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 8‑39 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-36
Driving and Operating
StabiliTrak Off light come on the
instrument panel cluster. If the
system has been turned off, press
and release the StabiliTrak/TCS
button to turn the system back on.
Engine Drag Control (EDC)
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, a Service StabiliTrak
message displays on the DIC and
the StabiliTrak/TCS warning light on
the instrument panel cluster comes
on. When this message and warning
light displays, the system is not
operational. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 4‑35 and Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 4‑25 for more information.
EDC improves vehicle stability by
sensing if there is difference in
speed between the free rolling front
wheels and the rear drive wheels
that often occurs when the driver
takes their foot off the accelerator
pedal on slippery surfaces (snow,
ice, etc.). When this is detected,
EDC sends more torque to the rear
wheels to make sure all four wheels
are spinning at similar speeds,
making the vehicle more stable.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started.
The system should be left on to help
assist with directional control of the
vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be
turned off, press and hold the
StabiliTrak/TCS button until the
Traction Control Off light and the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-37
Notice: Do not attempt to shift
when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have
traction. This may cause damage
to the transmission. Damage
caused by misuse of the vehicle
is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. See the warranty book
for additional information.
Competitive Driving Mode
Competitive Driving Mode and
Launch Control are systems
designed to allow increased
performance while accelerating
and/or cornering. This is
This light is on when the vehicle is
in the Competitive Driving Mode.
accomplished by regulating and
optimizing engine and brake
performance. These modes are
for use at a closed course race
track and are not intended for
use on public roads. They will
not compensate for a driver’s
inexperience or lack of familiarity
with the race track. Drivers who
prefer to allow the system to have
more control of the engine and
brake systems are advised to turn
StabiliTrak on. See Competitive
Driving on page 8‑7 for more
information.
On vehicles with a V8 engine, this
optional handling mode can be
selected by pressing the StabiliTrak/
TCS button on the console quickly
two times. “StabiliTrak Competitive
Mode” displays in the Driver
Competitive Driving Mode
In Competitive Driving Mode, the
StabiliTrak System helps maintain
directional control of the vehicle
by selective brake application
and controlling engine torque.
The Traction Control System (TCS)
helps control wheel spin and
Launch Control is available. Adjust
your driving style to account for the
available engine power. See Launch
Control later in this section.
Information Center (DIC). See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 4‑35
.
When the StabiliTrak button is
pressed again, or the vehicle is
restarted, the StabiliTrak and TCS
systems are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-38
Driving and Operating
Launch Control is only available
when the following criteria are met:
After the vehicle is launched,
the system continues in
Competitive Mode.
Launch Control (V8 with
Manual Transmission
Models Only)
1. Competitive Driving Mode is
selected.
Competitive Driving Mode and
Launch Control are systems
designed for a closed course race
track and not intended for use on
public roads. The systems are not
intended to compensate for lack of
driver experience or familiarity with
the race track.
A Launch Control feature is
available, within Competitive
Driving Mode on vehicles with a
manual transmission to allow the
driver to achieve high levels of
vehicle acceleration in a straight
line. Launch Control is a form of
traction control that manages tire
spin while launching the vehicle.
This feature is intended for use
during closed course race events
where consistent zero to sixty
and quarter mile times are
2. The vehicle is not moving.
3. The steering wheel is pointing
straight.
4. The clutch is pressed and the
vehicle is in first gear.
5. The accelerator pedal is rapidly
applied to wide open throttle.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
The Launch Control feature will
initially limit engine speed as the
driver rapidly applies the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle.
A smooth, quick release of the
clutch, while maintaining the fully
pressed accelerator pedal, will
manage wheel slip. Complete
shifts as described in Manual
Transmission on page 8‑30.
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear
axle can give more traction on
snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel.
When traction is low, this feature
allows the drive wheel with the
most traction to move the vehicle.
The limited-slip rear axle also gives
the driver enhanced control when
cornering hard or completing a
maneuver, such as a lane change.
desirable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-39
Setting Cruise Control
RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the
thumbwheel up to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed,
or to accelerate to a higher speed.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
thumbwheel down to set a speed or
to decrease the speed.
Setting Cruise Control
WARNING
{
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control buttons are
located on the outboard side of the
steering wheel.
1. Press 5 to turn cruise
control on.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
2. Get to the speed desired.
5 (On/Off): Turns the system on
or off. The indicator light is on when
cruise control is on and turns off
when cruise control is off.
3. Press the thumbwheel toward
SET/− and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
\ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control shuts off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-40
Driving and Operating
.
To slow down in small amounts,
push the thumbwheel toward
SET/− briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the
set speed from memory.
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Press the thumbwheel up toward
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
RES/+ and hold it until the
vehicle accelerates to the
desired speed, and then
release the switch.
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
press the thumbwheel up toward
RES/+ briefly. The vehicle returns
to the previous set speed and stays
there.
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.
.
To increase the speed in small
amounts, press the thumbwheel
up toward RES/+ briefly and
then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
This accelerates the vehicle to the
previously selected speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle's
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain
the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to maintain
the vehicle speed. When the brakes
are applied the cruise control is
disengaged.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Push the thumbwheel toward
SET/− and hold until the desired
lower speed is reached, then
release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-41
Ending Cruise Control
Object Detection
Systems
WARNING
{
There are three ways to end the
cruise control:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
.
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
To disengage cruise control;
Step lightly on the brake pedal
or clutch.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system, it assists the driver with
parking and avoiding objects while
in R (Reverse). URPA operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
and the sensors on the rear bumper
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
behind the vehicle, and at least
20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
.
Objects that are below the
.
Press \ to disengage the
cruise control.
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or too close or far
from the vehicle
.
To turn off the cruise control,
press 5 on the steering wheel.
.
Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
Erasing Speed Memory
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing, vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
the 5 button or if the ignition is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-42
Driving and Operating
bumper. The distance objects can
be detected may be less during
warmer or humid weather.
How the System Works
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
to indicate the system is working.
If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK
ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC,
see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑28 for more information.
This can occur under the following
conditions:
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to indicate that URPA is off.
The message disappears after
a short period of time.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is
See Object Detection System
Messages on page 4‑35 for other
URPA messages.
.
The driver has disabled the
system.
Turning the System On and Off
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not
The URPA system can be turned
on and off using the infotainment
system controls. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑38 for
more information.
continuous for five seconds.
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
To be detected, objects must be at
least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and
below trunk level. Objects must also
be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear
on page 9‑90
.
URPA defaults to the on setting
each time the vehicle is started.
.
The park assist sensors are
covered by frost or ice, which
can occur after washing the
vehicle in cold weather, keep
the sensors free of frost or ice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-43
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or an object was
Fuel
hanging out of the trunk during
the last drive cycle. Once the
object is removed, URPA will
return to normal operation.
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
.
.
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
If the system is still disabled, after
driving forward at least 40 km/h
(25 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-44
Driving and Operating
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code W) or the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher.
Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
page 11‑1
.
For best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 93. You can also
use regular unleaded gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher, but
the vehicle's acceleration could be
slightly reduced, and a slight audible
knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard.
If the octane rating is less than 87,
a heavy knocking noise might be
heard when driving. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible.
Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
(VIN Code V), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane
rating is less than 87, an audible
knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard
when driving. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification D 4814
in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 8‑45 for additional
information.
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-45
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean,
or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
California Fuel
Requirements
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States
or Canada, the proper fuel might
be hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards,
it is designed to operate on fuels
that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑20. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS, added to
the fuel tank at every engine oil
change, can help clean deposits
from fuel injectors and intake
valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive
recommended by General Motors.
It is available at your dealer.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-46
Driving and Operating
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol,
and reformulated gasolines
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission
control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp
might turn on. If this occurs, return
to your dealer for service.
WARNING (Continued)
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
might be available in your area.
We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Filling the Tank
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
WARNING
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near
fuel or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
The fuel cap is located behind a
hinged fuel door on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-47
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible.
See Exterior Care on page 9‑90.
WARNING
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
When reinstalling the cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks, otherwise
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp may
turn on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑20.
When replacing the fuel cap,
turn it clockwise until it clicks.
Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑20.
WARNING
{
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer.
The wrong type fuel cap might
not fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could
be badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
on page 4‑20
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-48
Driving and Operating
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
Towing
WARNING (Continued)
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that
has been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
WARNING
{
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
.
For information on driving
.
while towing a trailer, see
“Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
it is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
.
For information on equipment
to tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-49
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 9‑90. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motorhome, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
The following information has
WARNING (Continued)
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
Pulling A Trailer
page 9‑90
.
Here are some important points:
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
.
There are many laws, including
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle,
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
WARNING
{
see Trailer Towing on page 8‑53
Trailering changes handling,
acceleration, braking, durability
.
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
and fuel economy. With the added
weight, the engine, transmission,
wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder and under
greater loads. The trailer also adds
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper
trailering equipment.
.
During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-50
Driving and Operating
.
Vehicles with automatic
transmissions can tow in
D (Drive) but M (Manual
Mode) is recommended.
See “Manual Mode” in Automatic
Transmission on page 8‑26 for
more information. Use a lower
gear if the transmission shifts
too often. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better
not to use the highest gear.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing with a Stability Control
System
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
Following Distance
.
.
Use the cruise control when
towing.
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before returning to the lane.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-51
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
Driving On Grades
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to
move the trailer to the left, move
that hand to the left. To move the
trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down
a long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down,
the brakes might have to be used
so much that they would get hot
and no longer work well.
The arrows on the instrument panel
flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
Vehicles with automatic
transmissions can tow in
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you
may think other drivers are seeing
the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Making Turns
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode) is
recommended. See “Manual Mode”
in Automatic Transmission on
page 8‑26 for more information.
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better not
to use the highest gear.
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal.
Do this so the trailer won't strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-52
Driving and Operating
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. For vehicles with manual
transmissions, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of
gear and the parking brake applied,
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
Parking on Hills
WARNING
{
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park) for vehicles with an
automatic transmission or into
gear for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
Parking the vehicle on a hill
with the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission, or into gear
.
start the engine,
.
shift into a gear, and
.
release the parking brake.
for vehicles with a manual
transmission. Turn the wheels
into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
on page 9‑23
.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-53
a trailer are all important. It can
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
information.
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
the trip.
.
The weight of the trailer.
.
The weight of the trailer tongue.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in
the tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
.
The total weight on your
vehicle's tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can
write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance
Offices on page 12‑3 for more
information.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 9‑23
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-54
Driving and Operating
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
Tires
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12
for more information about the
vehicle's maximum load capacity.
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Tire-Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren't, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-55
Safety Chains
Towing Equipment
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the
tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
Notice: Do not add anything
is not intended for hitches.
Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it.
Use only a frame-mounted hitch
that does not attach to the
bumper.
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
maintained properly.
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes
are not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
not operating.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑34.
page 8‑25
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-56
Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-1
Manual Transmission
Headlamp Aiming
Vehicle Care
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 9-25
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-31
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-32
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Bulb Replacement
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessories and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamps (Base
Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamps
(Up-Level Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-13
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Recreational Vehicle
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-50
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Tire Terminology and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained
in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Vehicle Care
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories
to the vehicle can affect vehicle
performance and safety, including
such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
WARNING
{
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑34
.
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-5
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
Hood
To open the hood:
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑13
.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
2. Pull up on the secondary hood
release. The lever is located
near the middle of the hood.
page 2‑34
.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
3. Lift the hood.
1. Pull the release handle that is
located below the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then lift the hood to relieve
page 10‑12
.
pressure. Pull the hood down on
the passenger side to close it firmly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
3.6 L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-7
A. Underhood Electrical Center.
See Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑42.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10
.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle
I. Brake Master Cylinder and
Hydraulic Clutch (if equipped
with manual transmission)
Reservoir. See Brakes on
and Cap. See Engine Coolant
on page 9‑18
.
C. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
page 9‑27 or Hydraulic Clutch
D. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
on page 9‑15
.
View). See Cooling System on
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
page 9‑17
.
See Battery on page 9‑29.
E. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View).
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑15
.
page 9‑18
.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid
F. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (Out of View). See Power
Steering Fluid on page 9‑25.
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑26
.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Vehicle Care
6.2 L V8 Engine (L99 Engine shown LS3 similar)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Engine Cover
9-9
A. Underhood Electrical Center.
See Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑42.
H. Brake Master Cylinder and
Hydraulic Clutch (if equipped
with manual transmission)
Reservoir. See Brakes on
3.6 L V6 Engine Cover
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle
page 9‑27 or Hydraulic Clutch
and Cap. See Engine Coolant
on page 9‑15
.
on page 9‑18
.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
See Battery on page 9‑29.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of
page 9‑15
.
View). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10
.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
E. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
page 9‑26
.
F. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
L. Radiator Fill Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑18.
View). See Cooling System on
page 9‑17
.
To remove:
G. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (Under Engine Cover).
1. Remove the engine oil
fill cap (B).
See Power Steering Fluid on
2. Lift the engine cover (A) to
page 9‑25
.
disengage one front attachment
point.
3. Pull engine cover forward to
disengage from two rear tabs.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Vehicle Care
6.2 L V8 Engine Cover (L99
Engine shown LS3 similar)
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick,
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle
must be on level ground.
add at least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2
.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for the location of
the engine oil dipstick.
Notice: Do not add too much
oil. If the engine has so much oil
that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
To remove:
1. Remove the engine oil
fill cap (A).
2. Lift the engine cover (B) to
disengage two front attachment
points.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
3. Pull engine cover forward to
disengage from horizontal rear
attachments.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-11
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold,
where the temperature falls
below −29°C (−20°F), use either
an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an
SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at
extremely low temperatures. Always
use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
(V6 Engine)
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates that
the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM6094M.
.
SAE 5W-30
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on
an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not
use other viscosity oils such
as SAE 20W-50.
Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result
in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
.
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Vehicle Care
.
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
might not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30
with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not
meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil
change.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
(V8 Engines)
Look for three things:
.
GM4718M
This vehicle's engine requires a
special oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM
standard. Use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all that is needed
for good performance and engine
protection.
Notice: Using oils that do not
have the GM4718M Standard
designation can cause engine
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
This vehicle's engine was filled at
the factory with a Mobil 1® synthetic
oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
.
SAE 5W-30
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding
oil to maintain engine oil level, oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on
an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not
use other viscosity oils such
as SAE 20W-50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-13
1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible
that, if driving under the best
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
conditions, the oil life system might
not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service
people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
The system is reset when the
“Change Engine Oil Soon” message
goes off.
If the system is ever reset
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A “Change Engine
Oil Soon” message comes on.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑33. Change the oil as
soon as possible within the next
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Vehicle Care
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
What to Do with Used Oil
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Used engine oil contains elements
that can be unhealthy for your
skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin.
Clean your skin and nails with soap
and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing
or rags. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Lubricants on page 10‑8.
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
Manual Transmission
Fluid
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and
have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑8 for
the proper fluid to use.
disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
There is a special procedure
for checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, you should
have this done at your dealer
service department. Contact your
dealer for additional information
or the procedure can be found in
the service manual. To purchase
a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑13
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-15
See “Schedule Maintenance” in
Service and Maintenance for more
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
side of the reservoir. The brake/
hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed.
It is not necessary to regularly
check brake/clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
system. Adding fluid will not correct
a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Do not remove the cap to check
the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid
level. Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
When to Check and What
to Use
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5
.
The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this symbol on it.
The common hydraulic clutch and
brake master cylinder fluid reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for reservoir location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2. Locate the air filter housing
on the front of the driver side
of the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 9‑6.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Vehicle Care
3. Loosen the clamp at the duct of
the air cleaner/filter housing.
WARNING
{
4. Unlatch the retaining clips on the
air cleaner/filter housing.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
5. Lift cover at retaining clip
location high enough to clear
retaining clips and pull cover
outward to remove cover from
the air cleaner/filter housing
hinges.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
6. Pull straight up on cover, while
holding the cover remove the air
filter.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
7. Inspect or replace the air filter.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 10‑11.
8. Reverse steps 6 to 1 to install
cover.
3.6 L V6 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Housing shown (6.2 L V8 Engines
similar)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-17
Cooling System
When it is safe to lift the hood:
WARNING
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant
recovery bottle is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a
level surface.
6.2 L V8 Engines
(L99 shown LS3 similar)
A. Coolant Recovery Bottle
B. Electric Cooling Fans
C. Radiator Cap
3.6 L V6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Bottle
B. Electric Cooling Fans
C. Radiator Cap (under engine
cover)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Vehicle Care
The coolant level should be
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in the vehicle.
What to Use
between the MIN and MAX lines.
If it is not, you may have a leak at
the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
WARNING
{
Adding only plain water to
the cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
WARNING
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Engine Coolant
Do not run the engine if there is
a leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years
or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
If there seems to be no leak,
with the engine on, check to see
if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is
overheating, the fans should be
running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 9‑23
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-19
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check coolant as follows:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
2. Locate the coolant recovery
bottle. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 9‑6.
.
Gives boiling protection up
to 129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
4. There are maximum and
minimum markings on the
dipstick. When the engine is
cold, the coolant level should be
at or above the MIN mark on the
dipstick. After the vehicle has
been driven and the engine is at
normal operating temperature,
the level should be somewhere
between half full and the
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
3. Turn the coolant dipstick cap
counterclockwise and slowly pull
out the dipstick.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
maximum mark.
5. If the coolant level is correct,
replace the dipstick and turn the
cap clockwise to secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Vehicle Care
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Recovery Bottle
How to Add Coolant to the
Radiator
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Add coolant as follows:
1. Turn the coolant overflow bottle
dipstick cap counterclockwise
and slowly pull out the dipstick.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
2. Pour the coolant into the coolant
recovery bottle.
3. When the level is correct,
replace the dipstick and turn
the cap clockwise to secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-21
If coolant is needed, add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but
be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
4. If there is no coolant visible or
the level is low, slowly fill the
system through the radiator cap
opening with a 50/50 mixture
of DEX-COOL® and clean
drinkable water.
WARNING
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant
overflow bottle, add coolant as
follows:
Wait 30 seconds for coolant to
settle and continue filling if the
level drops.
3.6 L V6 Engine Fill Procedure
1. Locate the radiator cap. See
Do not spill coolant on the
accessory drive belts.
Engine Compartment Overview
WARNING
{
on page 9‑6
.
If a spill occurs, rinse the belt
with fresh water.
2. Remove engine cover to access
the radiator cap. See Engine
Cover on page 9‑9.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
5. Start the engine.
6. With the engine idling, continue
to add coolant through the
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
radiator cap opening until full.
Wait 30 seconds for the coolant
to settle and top off, if the level
drops.
3. Cover the radiator cap with a
thick cloth and turn it slowly
counterclockwise and remove.
7. Once the system is full, put the
radiator cap back on by turning
clockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Vehicle Care
8. With the engine still running,
raise the engine to 2500 RPM
for 30–40 seconds.
6.2 L V8 Engine Fill Procedure
1. Locate the radiator cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview
9. Turn the engine OFF.
on page 9‑6
.
10. Repeat steps 2–7 then turn the
engine off.
11. Allow engine to cool for
45 minutes. Top off coolant
through the radiator cap
opening and re-install the
radiator cap.
2. Cover the radiator cap with a
thick cloth and turn it slowly
counterclockwise and remove.
13. Check the coolant level in the
coolant recovery bottle and fill
it until the level is at the top
symbol on the dipstick.
12. Re-install the engine cover.
See Engine Cover on
page 9‑9
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-23
3. If there is no coolant visible or
the level is low, slowly fill the
system through the radiator cap
opening with a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and a
DEX-COOL® coolant until full.
7. Turn the engine OFF.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of engine overheating.
There is an engine coolant
temperature warning light on
your vehicle's instrument panel.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 4‑15.
Wait 30 seconds for coolant to
settle and top off if the level
drops.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program
Do not spill coolant on the
accessory drive belts.
If a spill occurs, rinse the belt
with fresh water.
on page 12‑6
.
8. Check the coolant level in the
coolant recovery bottle and fill it
until the level is at the top mark
on the dipstick.
4. Start the engine.
If you do decide to lift the hood,
make sure the vehicle is parked on
a level surface.
5. With the engine idling, top off the
coolant through the radiator cap
opening until full.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Wait 30 seconds for the coolant
to settle and top off, if the level
drops.
6. Once the system is full, put the
radiator cap back on by turning
clockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Vehicle Care
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
WARNING
{
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Notice: If the engine catches
fire because of being driven
with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-25
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
Check the level after the vehicle
has been driven for at least
twenty minutes so the fluid is warm.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF and let the engine
compartment cool down.
The power steering fluid reservoir
is located under the engine cover
on the driver side toward the front
of the engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
2. Remove the engine cover. Refer
to Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine
until it cools down.
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
page 9‑6
.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
4. Turn the cap counterclockwise
and pull it straight up.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
5. Wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Vehicle Care
6. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
Notice:
Washer Fluid
.
When using concentrated
What to Use
7. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
When windshield washer fluid
is needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating vehicle in an area
where the temperature can fall
below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against
freezing.
.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
When the engine is hot, the level
should be at the hot MAX level.
When the engine is cold, the
fluid level should be between
MIN and MAX on the dipstick.
Adding Washer Fluid
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8. Always
use the proper fluid.
damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the reservoir is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.
page 9‑6 for reservoir location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-27
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Brake Adjustment
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2.
WARNING
{
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Vehicle Care
.
A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes and/or clutch
will not work well.
When the brake/clutch fluid falls to
a low level, the brake warning light
comes on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑23.
Brake Fluid
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake
fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake/clutch hydraulic
system.
The brake/clutch master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
cap. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 9‑6 for the
location of the reservoir.
Always clean the brake/clutch
fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.
This helps keep dirt from entering
the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why
the fluid level in the reservoir might
go down:
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
.
The fluid level goes down
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake/clutch hydraulic system,
the brakes might not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always
use the proper brake/clutch fluid.
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-29
Notice:
Battery
WARNING (Continued)
.
Using the wrong fluid can
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for battery location.
badly damage brake/clutch
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
page 9‑86 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
DANGER
{
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
.
If brake fluid is spilled
on the vehicle's painted
surfaces, the paint finish
can be damaged. Be careful
not to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Rear Axle
Vehicle Storage
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss
could indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.
WARNING
{
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Vehicle Care
If the level is below the bottom
of the filler plug hole, add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
For 195 mm RDM V6 automatic:
How to Check Lubricant
To add lubricant when the level
is low, use 75W-90 gear Oil
(GM Part No. US 89021677, in
Canada Part No. 89021678)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
To completely refill after draining,
see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8. Then fill
to the bottom of the filler plug hole
with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
What to Use
For 218 mm rear drive module
(RDM) V6 manual, V8 automatic
and V8 manual:
To add lubricant when the level
is low, use 75W-90 LS gear oil
(GM Part No. US 89021677
and 1052358, in Canada
V6 Automatic Transmission
shown, V6 Manual Transmission,
V8 Automatic and Manual
transmission similar
Part No. 89021678 and 992694)
meeting GM Specification 9986226.
To completely refill after draining,
see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8. Then fill
to the bottom of the filler plug hole
with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
A. Fill Plug Hole
B. Drain Plug Hole
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-31
3. For automatic transmission
vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
System Check
WARNING
{
should start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal
is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
page 8‑32
.
contact your dealer for service.
2. Firmly apply the parking
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
brake. See Parking Brake on
page 8‑32
.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Vehicle Care
.
To check the P (Park)
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try
to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer for service.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear and cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2 for more information.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed
in different ways. For proper type
and length, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑11.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come
.
To check the parking brake's
out only in LOCK/OFF.
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-33
To replace the windshield wiper
blade:
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down towards the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming system has
been preset at the factory.
1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the aim of the headlamps
may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Allowing the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield.
Any damage that occurs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
It is recommended that a dealer
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim
the headlamps yourself, use the
following procedure.
5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
of the wiper blade where the
wiper arm attaches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Vehicle Care
The vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
.
The vehicle should be placed so
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)
from a light colored wall.
To adjust the vertical aim:
.
The vehicle must have all four
tires on a level surface which is
level all the way to the wall.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5 for more information.
.
The vehicle should be placed so
it is perpendicular to the wall or
other flat surface.
HID Headlamp
.
The vehicle should not have any
snow, ice, or mud on it.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low‐beam headlamp.
.
The vehicle should be fully
assembled and all other work
stopped while headlamp aiming
is being performed.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
.
The vehicle should be normally
loaded with a full tank of fuel and
one person or 75 kg (160 lbs)
sitting on the driver's seat.
Halogen Headlamp
.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-35
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in
front of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
4. At the wall measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
HID Headlamp
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with a 6 mm hex key.
8. Turn the vertical aiming
screw until the headlamp beam
is aimed to the horizontal tape
line. Turn it clockwise or
Halogen Headlamp
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Vehicle Care
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
WARNING
page 9‑41
.
{
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING
{
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
The up‐level vehicle has HID
headlamps. The park lamp function
is also a function of the HID
headlamp. After an HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, the beam
might be a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.
headlamp aim. The lamp on
the right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 6 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-37
To replace one of these bulbs:
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps (Base Vehicle)
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5
.
The base model vehicle has a
halogen headlamp and a turn
signal/parking lamp on the
headlamp assembly.
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Halogen Headlamp
3. Disconnect the wiring harness
and turn the bulb socket
2. Press in on the tabs located on
the sides of the duct and then
push the duct rearward into the
air cleaner/filter housing.
counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Vehicle Care
5. Push the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall the socket
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
To replace the turn signal bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5
.
6. Reconnect the electrical
connector.
7. Pull the duct back out of the air
cleaner/filter housing until the
tabs snap the duct back into
position.
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps (Up-Level Vehicle)
3. Disconnect the wiring harness
and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
The up–level model vehicle has a
HID headlamp and a turn signal
lamp on the headlamp assembly.
The park lamp is also the function
of the HID headlamp. See High
Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting
on page 9‑36 for more information.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
2. Press in on the tabs located on
the sides of the duct and then
push the duct rearward into the
air cleaner/filter housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-39
5. Push the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall the socket
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Push in the new bulb assembly
to lock it into place.
4. Reconnect the electrical
connector to the bulb assembly.
6. Reconnect the electrical
connector.
The base model vehicle daytime
running lamps are the low beam on
the halogen headlamp. If one these
lamps fail, see Headlamps, Front
Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
(Base Vehicle) on page 9‑37 or
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps (Up-Level Vehicle)
on page 9‑38 for replacement
information.
7. Pull the duct back out of the air
cleaner/filter housing until the
tabs snap the duct back into
position.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
The up–level model vehicle may
have daytime running lamps which
would be located on the fascia.
1. Locate the bulb assembly under
the front fascia.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb
assembly and pull out the bulb
assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Vehicle Care
3. Push in the new bulb assembly
to lock it into place.
Fog Lamps
The base model vehicle may have
fog lamps which would be located
on the fascia.
4. Reconnect the electrical
connector to the bulb assembly.
The up–level vehicle will not be
equipped with fog lamps.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
and Stoplamps
To replace a taillamp, turn signal,
or stoplamp bulb:
2. Remove the close out panel
retainers to gain access to the
bulb socket connectors.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 1‑8
.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of
the bulb socket.
1. Locate the bulb assembly under
the front fascia.
5. Push the new bulb straight into
the bulb socket until it clicks.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb
assembly and pull out the
bulb assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
to reinstall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-41
5. Push the bulb straight into the
socket and turn clockwise to
reinstall.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload
6. Reinstall the license plate lamp
by lifting it through the facia
opening until the clip is in place.
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
Replacement Bulbs
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused
by electrical problems.
Bulb
Number
Exterior Lamp
Daytime Running
Lamp (Up-level
vehicles)
P13W
Fog Lamp
PS24W
Front Park and Turn
Signal Lamp
1. Unclip the license plate lamp
from the facia opening.
3457NAK
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
Halogen Headlamp
License Plate Lamp
H13
2. Pull the license plate lamp down
through the facia opening.
.
Headlamp Wiring
W5W
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the lamp
socket.
Rear Turn Signal
and Taillamps
.
3157K
Power Windows and other
Power Accessories
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
4. Install the new bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
To check a fuse, look at the
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
Fuses of the same amperage
can be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible.
To remove the hinged fuse block
cover, press the clip at the front of
the cover, and swing it up.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 9‑42, Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 9‑45, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
page 9‑47
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-43
J-Case
Usage
Fuses
Brake
Vacuum Pump
22
Power
Windows Rear
25
26
Power Windows
Front
27
41
Rear Defog
Cooling Fan High
Front Heater,
42
Ventilation and Air
Conditioning
Antilock Brake
System Pump
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
43
44
Cooling Fan Low
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
6
Wiper
12
Starter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
10
11
Fuel Injectors – Odd
Cooling Fan Relay
Outside Rear View
Mirror
1
31
Transmission
Control Module
Canister Vent
Solenoid
Manifold Air Flow/
Chassis Control
2
5
32
33
14
Engine Control
Module Main
Body Control
Module #6
15
16
Ignition
Run/Crank IP
Pre-Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor
34
35
38
Sunroof
Sensing Diagnostic
Module/Ignition
7
17
18
Front Heated Seats
Washer Pump Front
Run/Crank Body
Post-Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor
Antilock Brake
System Valves
8
9
Transmission
Control Module/
Ignition
40
46
19
20
HID Headlamp –
Left Front
Fuel
Injectors – Even
Engine Control
Module/Ignition
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-45
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
Mini Fuses
Usage
Micro
Relays
Usage
HID Headlamp –
Right Front
47
K61
K69
Starter
50
51
52
Fog Lamps
Horn
Wiper Control
K613
Cooling Fan Low
Spare
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
K617
K619
High Beam
Headlamp – Right
Front
55
Wiper Speed
High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamps
High Beam
Headlamp –Left
Front
K627
K632
56
61
Brake
Heated Mirror
Vacuum Pump
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the end of the instrument
panel, on the driver side of the
vehicle. To access the fuses, open
the fuse panel door by pulling out.
Mini Relays
K26
Usage
Powertrain
K50
Run / Crank
To reinstall the door, push the door
back into its original location.
K55
Rear Defog
K612
Cooling Fan High
Cooling Fan Control
K614
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Vehicle Care
Fuses
F9
Usage
Spare
Spare
F10
F11
F12
F13
Not Used
Spare
Display
OnStar® Universal
Hands Free Phone
F14
F15
F16
Body Control
Module 3
Body Control
Module 4
F17
F18
Power Outlet 1
Power Outlet 2
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Steering Wheel
Controls Backlight
F19
Discrete Logic
Ignition Switch
Heating Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Controller
F1
F2
F5
F20
F21
F22
F23
Spare
Diagnostic Link
Connector
Spare
Body Control
Module
F6
F8
Not Used
Trunk
F3
F4
Airbag
Cluster
Battery
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-47
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
Fuses
Usage
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Automatic Occupant
Sensing
F24
CB7
Passenger Seat
Driver Seat
Body Control
Module 1
CB26
F25
Relays
Usage
Body Control
Module 8
F27
F28
F29
Retained Accessory
Power
K10
Spare
K605
K609
Not Used
Trunk
Body Control
Module 5
Body Control
Module 7
F30
The rear compartment fuse block is
located on the right side of the trunk
behind a cover. Remove the six
convenience net retainers, the rear
sill plate, and the two passenger
side trim retainers, then swing the
trim out of the way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Vehicle Care
Fuses
F11
Usage
Spare
Spare
F12
Engine Control
Module/Battery
F13
F14
Regulated Voltage
Control
Fuel System Control
Module
F15
F16
Spare
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
F5
Usage
Convertible Top 1
Convertible Top 2
Spare
Universal Garage
Door Opener/
Ultra–sonic Reverse
Parking Aid
F6
F1
F7
F8
Spare
F2
F3
F4
Amplifier
Radio
F9
Spare
F10
Spare
Spare
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Winter Tires
9-49
Wheels and Tires
WARNING (Continued)
If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want
to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but
they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of
performance as winter tires on
snow or ice covered roads.
.
Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions about
your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your
vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional
information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction
on snow and ice covered roads.
With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After switching to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
WARNING
{
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
.
Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged,
replace them.
.
See your dealer for details
Overloading your tires can
regarding winter tire availability
and proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 9‑65.
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Vehicle Care
If you choose to use winter tires:
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
.
Use tires of the same brand and
Useful information about a
tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples below show a
typical passenger vehicle tire
and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
.
Use only radial ply tires of the
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire's maximum speed capability.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is
a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-51
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑85 and If a Tire Goes
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
Flat on page 9‑71
.
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
Grading on page 9‑67
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Vehicle Care
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(E) Tire Inflation: The
Tire Designations
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
Tire Size
The following illustration
shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
page 9‑56
.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-53
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
conditioning.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
on page 9‑56
.
Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
passengers and cargo.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Vehicle Care
DOT Markings: A code
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is
in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Limits on page 8‑12
.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12
.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12
.
Maximum Load Rating:
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-55
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
Speed Rating: An
Tires on page 9‑64
.
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system
that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
page 8‑12
.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
page 9‑67
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
Limits on page 8‑12
.
.
Rough ride
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
.
Needless damage from
road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label
.
Too much flexing
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
is attached to your vehicle.
This label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or
irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
Load Limits on page 8‑12
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-57
For additional information
How to Check
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and
an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label,
see Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑12. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling
and ride comfort. Never load
your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. The compact
spare should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑85
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Vehicle Care
Vehicles with 245/45ZR20 103Y,
P245/50ZR19 104W and
275/40ZR20 106Y size tires,
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
have tires capable of high speed
use. Make sure the tires are inflated
to the recommended cold inflation
pressures before operating the
vehicle at speeds over 100 mph
(160 km/h). See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12 and Tire Pressure on
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle's
tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
page 9‑56
.
When you end this high-speed
Each tire, including the spare
driving, return the tires to the cold
inflation pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12
and Tire Pressure on page 9‑56.
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-59
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑60 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑17 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Vehicle Care
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn
the driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle
has one. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle's tires and transmits the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑12.
The Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for the
tires when they are cold. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12
for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle. Also see
Tire Pressure on page 9‑56.
,
Using the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the driver can also check
tire pressure levels using the DIC.
For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and
displays see Tire Messages on
A DIC warning message to check
the pressure in a specific tire is also
shown on the DIC display screen.
The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come
at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 9‑63, Tire Rotation on
page 9‑63 and Tires on page 9‑49.
page 4‑36
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-61
.
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle's tires.
The DIC message should go
off after successfully completing
the sensor matching process.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
Notice: Using non‐approved tire
sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go
off when the TPMS sensors
are installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer
for service.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 9‑73 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
.
One of the road tires has been
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 9‑65.
replaced with the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one. The spare
tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The DIC message
should go off once you re‐install
the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
Vehicle Care
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
To decrease the tire's air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve
cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
3. Go to the TPM vehicle
information screen on the DIC.
See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑28. Press set
to relearn the sensors. The horn
sounds twice to signal the
receiver is in relearn mode and
Tire Learning Active message
displays on the DIC screen.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer for
service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
4. Start with the driver side
front tire.
You have two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall, to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match
the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions, the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
5. Remove the valve cap from
the valve stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure
for 10 seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which can take up to 30 seconds
to sound, confirms that the
TPMS sensor identification code
has been matched to this tire
position.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
replace one or more of the TPMS
sensors or rotate your vehicle's
tires, the identification codes need
to be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer for service.
The TPMS matching process is
outlined below:
6. Proceed to the passenger
side front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to
ON/RUN with the engine off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-63
7. Proceed to the passenger
side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
Tire rotation is recommended if
the vehicle has the same size
tires on all four wheel positions.
These tires should be rotated
every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See
Scheduled Maintenance on
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure in
Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn
chirp, for the driver side rear tire,
the horn sounds two more times
to signal the tire learning mode
is no longer active. Turn the
page 10‑2
.
page 9‑64 for more information.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
Tire Rotation
Tire rotation is not
recommended if the vehicle has
different size tires on the front
and rear wheels.
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire
and loading information label.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 9‑64 and Wheel
Different tire sizes should not be
rotated front to rear. Each tire
and wheel should only be used
in its original front or rear
position.
11. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
The tires air pressure will not
appear on the screen until you start
driving the vehicle.
Replacement on page 9‑69
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-64
Vehicle Care
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
When It Is Time for New
Tires
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑60
.
Various factors, such as
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
page 11‑2
.
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
The compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, is not included
in the tire rotation.
the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or
less of tread remaining.
on page 9‑71
.
page 8‑12
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-65
The vehicle needs new tires if any
of the following statements are true:
wear out before they degrade due
to age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that
impact the overall performance
of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride
and handling, traction control,
and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
.
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric
Buying New Tires
showing through the tire's
rubber.
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle,
when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑50
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
The rubber in tires degrades over
time. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, even
if it is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-66
Vehicle Care
See Tire Inspection on page 9‑63
and Tire Rotation on page 9‑63
for information on proper tire
rotation.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
WARNING
{
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires
are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the
proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
WARNING
{
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is
all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
If you must replace your
System on page 9‑58
.
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial
and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Your vehicle's original
equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading
Information Label. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12, for
more information about the Tire
and Loading Information Label
and its location on your vehicle.
Spare Tire on page 9‑85
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-67
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
WARNING
{
If you add different sized
If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
wheels, your vehicle may not
provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls
of most passenger car tires.
See Buying New Tires on
page 9‑65 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑4 for
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-68
Vehicle Care
The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system
does not apply to deep
tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a
half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
characteristics and climate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-69
Temperature – A, B, C
temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See
your dealer for proper diagnosis.
excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.
Each new wheel should have
the same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-70
Vehicle Care
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
You could have a collision in
which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, rear differential,
bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and
chassis.
WARNING
{
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑71 for more information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-71
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.
Tire Chains
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
vehicle, and do not spin the
wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them
on the rear tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle and
you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type
of traction device only if its
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs
is dangerous without the
manufacturer recommends it for
use on the vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer's
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of
the traffic lane.
instructions. To help avoid
damage to the vehicle, drive
slowly, re‐adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-72
Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
WARNING (Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
Warning Flashers on page 5‑4.
WARNING
{
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be
To be certain the vehicle will
not move, put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
dangerous. The vehicle can
slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people.
You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level
place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
page 9‑79. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
(Continued)
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 9‑73
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-73
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
WARNING
{
Over-inflating a tire could
cause the tire to rupture and
you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read and follow the
tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire
to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
WARNING
{
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) in
the tread area of the tire. It can
also be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑25.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 12‑6.
WARNING
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-74
Vehicle Care
The kit includes:
Tire Sealant
Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and Inflate
a Punctured Tire
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the compressor.
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to
seal one tire. After usage, the
sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced.
See “Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
A. On/Off Button
B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
C. Pressure Relief Button
D. Pressure Gauge
When using the tire sealant
and compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for 5 minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
E. Air Only Hose (Black)
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Power Plug
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-75
Always do a safety check first.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑71. Do not remove any
objects that have penetrated
the tire.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
8. Turn the selector switch (B)
clockwise to the Sealant + Air
position.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
9. Press the on/off (A) button
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
page 4‑9
.
The pressure gauge (D) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
page 9‑79
.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-76
Vehicle Care
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on
page 12‑6.
15. Replace the sealant/air
hose (F), and the power
plug (G) back in their original
location.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (D). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
11. Press the on/off button (A)
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12 through 18
must be done immediately after
Step 11.
The pressure gauge (D) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended
16. If the flat tire was able to
inflate to the recommended
inflation pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from
the sealant canister and place
it in a highly visible location.
The label is a reminder not to
exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) until
the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-77
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
If the tire pressure has
not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the
recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to
the recommended inflation
pressure.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11
under “Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured).”
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 12‑6.
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
23. After temporarily sealing a
tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within a 161 km (100 miles) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑71
.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 9‑79
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-78
Vehicle Care
2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)
and the power plug (G).
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
11. Press the on/off button (A)
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
8. Turn the selector switch (B)
counterclockwise to the Air Only
position.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to
turn the compressor on.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (E) from the tire
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (D). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
14. Replace the air only hose (E)
and the power plug (G) and
cord back in its original
location.
page 4‑9
.
The pressure gauge (D) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
9-79
6. Screw the connector (B) to the
canister (A).
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
To remove the sealant canister:
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
Spare Tire
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 1‑8
.
2. Remove the carpet.
1. Remove the plastic cover.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from
the canister (A).
This vehicle may have a tire sealant
and compressor kit in place of a
jack or spare tire. It is located in a
foam container in the trunk.
3. Pull up on the canister (A) to
remove it.
3. Turn the center retainer
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire cover.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
4. Remove the spare tire and place
it next to the tire being changed.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-80
Vehicle Care
Tools
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If the vehicle has wheel bolt
caps, remove the caps. Store
the caps with the wheel cover.
1. The jack and tools are stored
below the spare tire.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Jack Handle Extension
C. Jack
Remove the jack from the
retaining bracket.
2. Remove the tool container.
3. Remove the tools from the tool
container.
2. Use the fully extended
wheel wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts one-half turn
counterclockwise. Do not
remove them.
4. Place the tools next to the tire
being changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-81
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
4. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
WARNING
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
5. Fit the jack handle extension
onto the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack.
WARNING
{
Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
3. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire.
The location is indicated by a
mark on the bottom edge of the
vehicle. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
Raise the jack until it engages
with the jacking point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-82
Vehicle Care
6. Insert the other end of the jack
handle into the wrench.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle extension clockwise
until the vehicle is far enough off
the ground to allow enough room
for the compact spare tire to fit
under the vehicle.
8. Remove all of the wheel nuts
and place them in a dry, clean
place to avoid getting dirt in the
threads.
Keep the hook parallel to the
ground. The wrench may need
to be removed and repositioned
to continue turning it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-83
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
11. Reinstall the wheel nuts with
the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel. Tighten each
nut as much as possible using
the wheel wrench until the
wheel is held firmly against
the hub.
9. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
Use your free hand to prevent
the wheel from turning while
you are tightening.
10. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
on page 9‑71
.
12. Lower the vehicle by
turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower
the jack completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-84
Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
WARNING (Continued)
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
WARNING
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts
in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
To store a flat or spare tire and
tools:
1. Replace the jack and tools.
2. Replace the spare tire cover.
WARNING
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
3. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
to tighten.
4. Replace the rear trunk carpet.
5. Place the flat tire face up on the
load floor.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-85
After installing the compact
Compact Spare Tire
spare on the vehicle, stop as soon
as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to
105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up
to 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you
can finish your trip and have the
full-size tire repaired or replaced at
your convenience. Of course, it is
best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
WARNING
{
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time
could result in loss of braking
and handling. This could lead
to a crash and you or others
could be injured. Use only one
compact spare tire at a time.
6. Route the strap provided, as
shown, to secure the flat tire.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi).
The compact spare tire is for
temporary use only. Replace the
compact spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-86
Vehicle Care
The spare tire will last longer and be
in good shape in case it is needed
again.
Jump Starting
WARNING (Continued)
If the battery has run down, try
to use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: When the compact
spare is installed, do not take
the vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
WARNING
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
Do not mix the compact spare tire
or wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-87
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
3. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 8‑22
.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.
The jump start positive (A) and
negative (B) posts are located in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle.
The positive jump start connection
is covered by a red cap. Remove to
expose the terminal.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
These posts are used instead of a
direct connection to the battery.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and switch off all lights and
accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
flashers if needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-88
Vehicle Care
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you don't, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
WARNING
{
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
5. Connect one end of the red
positive (+) cable to the jump
start positive (+) post (A).
6. Connect the other end of
the red positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the
good battery (B).
WARNING
{
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
7. Connect one end of the black
negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) terminal of the
good battery (C).
(Continued)
8. Connect the other end of the
black negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) post (D).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-89
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
10. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (–)
Terminal
5. Return the caps over the
positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals to their original
positions.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-90
Vehicle Care
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
towing the vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put
the vehicle on a flatbed truck or
trailer.
Towing
Appearance Care
Towing the Vehicle
Exterior Care
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all
four wheels off the ground. Consult
your dealer or a professional towing
service if the disabled vehicle
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
needs to be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12‑6.
The vehicle was neither designed
nor intended to be towed with any
of its wheels on the ground. If the
vehicle must be towed, see “Towing
the Vehicle” earlier in this section.
If the vehicle has lost battery power,
the shift lever needs to be manually
released to neutral for towing. See
“Shift Lock Manual Release” under
Shifting Out of Park on page 8‑23.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
To tow the vehicle behind
another vehicle for recreational
purposes — such as behind a
motorhome, see Recreational
Vehicle Towing following.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-91
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather, and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam, or caustic soap
to clean aluminum. A coating
of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright
metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Do not use cleaning agents
that are petroleum based or
that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint,
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-92
Vehicle Care
Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. Follow all
manufacturer directions regarding
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
Notice: Chrome wheels and
other chrome trim may be
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
damaged if the vehicle is not
washed after driving on roads
that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always
wash the vehicle's chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑8.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-93
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
.
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-94
Tires
Vehicle Care
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system
can do this.
Finish Damage
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body
and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-95
can result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue
to look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on
the upholstery and cause damage
to the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to
the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
.
Never apply heavy pressure or
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior,
only use cleaners specifically
designed for the surfaces that are
being cleaned. Permanent damage
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-96
Vehicle Care
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
To clean:
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
.
Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Leather
2. Remove excess moisture.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
dampened with water can be
used. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat, steam,
spot lifters or spot removers,
or shoe polish on leather.
Many commercial leather cleaners
and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect leather
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle
may only be used on floor carpet
and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-97
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be
used. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-98
Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-1
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
General Information
Notice: Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good
working condition. Damage
caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section.
We recommend having your
dealer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps
to keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
on page 8‑12
.
.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-12
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 8‑44
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts,
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
WARNING
{
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 10‑11. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do
the work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 9‑4.
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
Rotation of New Tires
Tire rotation is not recommended if
the vehicle has different size tires
on the front and rear wheels. If tire
rotation is recommended for the
vehicle, to maintain ride, handling,
and performance of the vehicle,
it is important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire
Rotation on page 9‑63.
When the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform
At your dealer, you can be
certain that you will receive the
highest level of service available.
Your dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as, up to
date tools and equipment to ensure
fast and accurate diagnostics.
this work and reset the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-3
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only).
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10
An Emission Control Service.
.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑15
.
.
Engine coolant level check.
.
Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑13
.
page 9‑18
.
When the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections
are required. The services
described for Maintenance I should
be performed at every engine oil
change. The services described
for Maintenance II should be
performed when:
.
Windshield washer fluid level
Maintenance II
.
check. See Washer Fluid on
Perform all services described in
Maintenance I.
page 9‑26
.
.
.
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
.
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection
for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑63.
.
If tire rotation is recommended
for the vehicle, rotate tires.
Maintenance I was performed
.
Engine cooling system
the last time the engine oil was
changed.
inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
See Tire Rotation on page 9‑63.
.
.
Fluids visual leak check
It has been 10 months or more
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and
the fluid level checked.
since the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message has displayed
or since the last service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Service and Maintenance
.
.
.
Windshield wiper blade
Automatic transmission fluid
level check and adding fluid,
if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 9‑90. Worn
or damaged wiper blade
page 9‑26
.
Once a Month
page 9‑14
.
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
.
.
.
Rear axle fluid level check and
adding fluid, if needed. See Rear
Axle on page 9‑29.
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9‑32.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑63.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15.
.
Body hinges and latches,
key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and sunroof
(if equipped) lubrication.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑8
More frequent lubrication may
be required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with
a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Once a Year
.
See Starter Switch Check on
Passenger compartment air
filter replacement (or every
12 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty
conditions.
page 9‑31
.
.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control System
Check on page 9‑31.
.
.
.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 9‑32.
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
page 9‑32
.
.
.
Engine oil level check.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
Engine cooling system and
pressure cap pressure check.
Radiator and air conditioning
condenser outside cleaning.
See Cooling System on
.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 2‑21.
.
Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑18
.
page 9‑17
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-5
.
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
terrain, when frequently towing
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
a trailer, or used for taxi,
police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑14.
.
Engine cooling system drain,
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
.
Rear axle fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of
the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 9‑73.
driven in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a
trailer, used for high speed or
competitive driving, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service.
See Rear Axle on page 9‑29.
System on page 9‑17. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt
inspection for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An
Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑14.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15.
.
Rear axle fluid change (normal
service). See Rear Axle on
page 9‑29
.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service)
for vehicles mainly driven
in heavy city traffic in hot
weather, in hilly or mountainous
.
Spark plug replacement.
An Emission Control Service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
If tire rotation is recommended for the vehicle, rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-7
Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
II
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
•
•
•
Restraint system components check.
•
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
•
Rear axle fluid level check.
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
Passenger compartment air filter replacement.
•
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
Engine Oil (V6 Engine)
The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be identified with the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. However,
not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM
standard. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
For the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
Engine Oil (V8 Engines)
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18.
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Hydraulic Brake System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-9
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Hydraulic Clutch System
Windshield Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC‐LB.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Parking Brake Cable Guides
Automatic Transmission
SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. U.S. 88862475,
in Canada 88862476).
Manual Transmission (V6 Engine)
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
Manual Transmission (V8 Engine)
Rear Axle (V6 Engine with Automatic Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Transmission) in Canada 89021678).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677 and Friction Modifier 1052358,
in Canada 89021678 and Friction Modifier 992694).
Rear Axle (V6 Engine with Manual
Transmission)
Rear Axle (V8 Engine)
Key Lock Cylinders
Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677 and Friction Modifier 1052358,
in Canada 89021678 and Friction Modifier 992694).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
92196275
A3137C
3.6L V6 Engine
25177917
89017524
92220249
PF2129
PF48
—
6.2L V8 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
3.6L V6 Engine
12597464
12621258
41-990
41-110
6.2L V8 Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side
92231676
92231677
—
—
Passenger Side
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-13
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
11-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the
following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Application
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Engine Cooling System
3.6L V6 Engine Automatic Transmission
3.6L V6 Engine Manual Transmission
6.2L V8 Engine (L99) Automatic Transmission
6.2L V8 Engine (LS3) Manual Transmission
Engine Oil with Filter
10.2 L
10.6 L
10.8 L
11.2 L
10.8 qt
11.2 qt
11.4 qt
11.8 qt
3.6L V6 Engine
5.7 L
7.6 L
7.6 L
6.0 qt
8.0 qt
8.0 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (L99)
6.2L V8 Engine (LS3)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
11-3
Capacities
English
Application
Metric
Fuel Tank
71.0 L
18.8 gal
Rear Axle Fluid
V6 Engine 6–Speed Automatic
V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual*
V8 Engine*
0.9 L
0.9 L
0.9 L
1.0 qt
1.0 qt
1.0 qt
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
V6 Engine 6–Speed Automatic**
V8 Engine 6–Speed Automatic**
V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual
V8 Engine 6–Speed Manual
Wheel Nut Torque
6.3 L
6.3 L
6.7 qt
6.7 qt
1.8 L
1.9 qt
3.9 L
4.2 qt
190 Y
140 ft lb
*Add 2.5 oz. (75 mL) of friction modifier to the specified quantity of axle lubricant.
**See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑14 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
3.6L V6 (LLT)
V
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
6.2L V8 (L99)
6.2L V8 (LS3)
J
Automatic
Manual
1.0 mm (0.040 in)
1.0 mm (0.040 in)
W
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.2L V8 Engines
3.6L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Courtesy Transportation
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-15
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-17
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for
relief available to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two,
you can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although
you may be required to resort to
this informal dispute resolution
program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge
and your case will generally be
.
Vehicle Identification Number
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
(VIN). This is available from
the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Customer Assistance
Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
United States — Customer
Assistance
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Customer Information
From Puerto Rico:
Overseas — Customer
Assistance
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet
by dialing: 1-800-833-2438.
(TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Mexico, Central America, and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
Canada — Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-5
Other Helpful Links
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
Online Owner Center
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
chevrolet
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
.
My Dealers: Save details such
.
FAQ
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
.
Contact Us
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
My GM Canada
(Canada) — www.gm.ca
information, and more
.
My Driveway: Access quick links
.
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
Online service and maintenance
My GM Canada is a
records
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
.
Chevrolet dealer locator for
service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
Recall notices for your specific
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember
.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
Services Earnings summaries
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-6
Customer Information
.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN),
and delivery date of the vehicle
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
Roadside Assistance
Program
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles,
call 1‐800‐243‐8872;
(Text Telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 miles),
whichever comes first.
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
.
Telephone number of your
location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-7
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Services Provided
.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
registration is required.
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service to
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have
OnStar®. For security reasons,
the driver must present
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
identification before this
service is given.
.
Mounting, dismounting,
.
or changing of snow tires,
Emergency Tow From a Public
chains, or other traction devices.
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-8
Customer Information
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometers from where
your trip was started to
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
Program
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and
advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize
your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base
Warranty Coverage period in
Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both
the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may
give permission to get local
immediately, keep driving it until
it can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to
$100, after sending the original
receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-9
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to
provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle that you obtain
if your vehicle is kept for an
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of
the dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only
be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service.
In addition, for U.S. customers,
should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original
overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and
must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
you with shuttle service to get you
to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip
shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-10
Customer Information
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Additional Program
Information
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
General Motors reserves the right
to unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are
new parts made with the same
materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-11
Aftermarket collision parts are
also available. These are made
by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts is not covered by that
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences
in the quality of coverage afforded
by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
warranty.
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that
your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision
parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 12‑6
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-12
Customer Information
Gather the following information:
initially value the repair using
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if your vehicle is leased, you may
be obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
.
Driver's name, address, and
telephone number
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you have
a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify
to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
.
.
Driver's license number
Owner's name, address, and
telephone number
.
.
Vehicle license plate number
Vehicle make, model, and
model year
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
.
.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Insurance company and policy
number
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 2‑28.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-13
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Owner Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and
intended to provide basic
operational information about
the vehicle. The owner manual
includes the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
Service Manuals
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
at: helminc.com
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering,
body, etc.
Or you can write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model
Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles. To
request an order form, specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-14
Customer Information
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, and notify
General Motors of Canada Limited.
Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C. 20590
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify General Motors.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how
a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
.
How various systems in your
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-16
Customer Information
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
OnStar®
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on
data collection and use. See also
OnStar® System on page 4‑42 in
this manual for more information.
investigation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-17
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with
any other GM system containing
personal information.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-18
Customer Information
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Assistance Program,
A
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Audio System
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-1
Automatic
Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-26
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Shiftlock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-19
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Antenna
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-36
Antilock Brake
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Active Fuel Management™ . . . . 8-25
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-34
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-15
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-28
When Should an Airbag
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-95
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
High Intensity Discharge
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-20
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-32
Child Restraints
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-86
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Voltage and Charging
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-41
Taillamps, Turn Signal and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Infants and Young
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-32
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 6-21, 6-22, 6-25
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Headlamps, Front
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Lower Anchors and
C
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-45
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50, 2-52
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-43
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-95
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 7-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-1
Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . .9-37, 9-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 8-37
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Covers
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-13
Customer Satisfaction
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Driving
Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Characteristics and
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7, 8-37
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-15
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-39
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Engine (cont.)
E
F
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Cooling System Messages . . .4-33
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-26
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-15
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Electrical Equipment,
Filter
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Rear Compartment Fuse
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Filling a Portable Fuel
G
H
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Gasoline
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Headlamps
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-45
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-44
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Requirements, California . . . . .8-45
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Rear Compartment Fuse
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Gauges
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-39
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-3
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to Wear Safety Belts
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Engine Oil Temperature . . . . . . .4-14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Transmission Temperature . . . .4-16
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
Lighting
I
L
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-3
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-17
Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Traction Control
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Ignition Transmission Lock
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Lamps
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1
Daytime
Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-39
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Headlamps, Front
Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . .9-37, 9-38
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-20
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
LATCH System
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
K
Replacing Parts After a
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-34
Keyless Entry
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
OFF/StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . .4-25
Traction Control System
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Locks
Messages
Mirrors
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-36
Battery Voltage and
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Monitor System, Tire
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-33
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Object Detection System . . . . .4-35
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
M
Maintenance
N
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-20
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
O
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Oil
Power
P
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-13
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-36
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Overview
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-17
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-24
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-29
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Phone
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Overview, Infotainment
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 6-21, 6-22, 6-25
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Replacement Parts
R
S
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-36
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-38
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roof
Radio Frequency
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
How to Wear Safety Belts
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-17
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-90
Reimbursement Program,
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-21
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-20
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4
Running the Vehicle While
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Seats
Shifting
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
System Check
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Securing Child
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Spare Tire
Automatic Transmission
Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
Specifications and
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, 2-52
Security
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Service
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
StabiliTrak
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 4-27
Taillamps
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Accessories and
Turn Signal, and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-12
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Servicing the
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-11
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Tires (cont.)
Towing
Transportation Program,
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-60
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-58
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Terminology and
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-49
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Control OFF/StabiliTrak
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-41
Uniform Tire Quality
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-34
Control System (TCS)/
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-44
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
StabiliTrak®
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-38
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Transmission
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-69
When It Is Time for New
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
V
W
Vehicle
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Vehicle Care
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
When It Is Time for New
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . .9-79
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Where to Put the Child
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Windshield
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Black Decker Coffeemaker CM1010B User Manual
Blanco Indoor Furnishings 157 130 User Manual
Cambridge Audio Stereo System KP10 User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Cordless Drill PL154598 User Manual
Canon Digital Camera 1000 User Manual
Carrier Heat Pump 38EYA User Manual
Casio Calculator FX ES User Manual
Casio Video Game Keyboard CTK 100 User Manual
Chromalox Electric Heater ADH 005 User Manual
Cisco Systems Conference Phone CP8831DCK9 User Manual